Home

Operating Instructions - Cinematography Mailing List

1. DISP MODE Message appears when Message settings 1 2 3 CC ND filter changed FILTER n n 1 2 3 4 OJOJj Gain changed o Ae 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 O Maal bees WHITE BAL switch re positioned WHITE n n A B PRE OJOJ AONE positioned at AUTO KNEE ON or OFF Gra Shutter speed mode changed SS Uea a 20 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 Olele White balance adjusted AWB performed Example AWB A OK 3 2 K O e o Black balance adjusted ABB performed Example ABB OK O o e Extender selected Example EXTENDER ON OJOJ USER button selected Example UM S GAIN 30 dB O e o MARKER SELECT button selected Example MKR A OJOJ Iris being overridden Example F 5 6 O o Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder Screen Status Displays Message appears O Message does not appear Adjustments and Settings for Recording 69 E Setting the Marker Displays The center safety zone safety zone area and frame markers may be set to ON or OFF along with specifications of the marker types To set and select markers go to the VF MARKER screen from the VF page and select the appropriate options For directions on navigating the menu see Setting Menu Options page 139 lt VF MARKER gt MKR A TABLE A CENTER MARK 1 SAFETY ZONE 12 SAFETY AREA 90 FRAME SIG 24 3 FRAME MARK OFF FLAME LVL 215 N
2. Items Adjustable Remake Data Saved Range GAIN OdB ON For the setting to turn the lamp on the OFF viewfinder on when the GAIN is set to a IC U FIR value other than 0 dB GAIN 3dB JON For the setting to turn the lamp on the OFF viewfinder on when the GAIN is set to a IC U FIR value other than 3dB DS GAIN ON For the setting to turn the lamp on the OFF viewfinder on when the DS GAIN clulF R cumulative gain is activated LINE MIX ON For the setting to turn the lamp on the OFF viewfinder on when the LINE MIX GAIN ICIUIF R is activated SHUTTER ON For the setting to turn the lamp on the OFF viewfinder on when the electronic IC U FIR shutter is activated WHITE ON For the setting to turn the lamp on the PRESET OFF viewfinder on when the WHITE BAL IC U FIR switch is set to the PRST position EXTENDER JON For the setting to turn the lamp on the OFF viewfinder on when the lens extender is IC U FIR activated B GAMMA ON For the setting to turn the lamp on the OFF viewfinder on when the BLACK GAMMA IC U FIR is activated MATRIX ON For the setting to turn the lamp on the OFF viewfinder on when the color correction ICIU FIR table for the linear matrix is selected COLOR ON For the setting to turn the lamp on the CORRECTION OFF viewfinder on when the 12 axis IC U FIR independent color correction is selected FILTER ON For the setting to turn the la
3. SD CARD READ WRITE SD CARD R W SELECT Items Adjustable Remarks Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range R SELECT 1 Select the file number to read out SYSTEM ON Specify whether or not to use the MODE RW OFF settings for the options on the SYSTEM F 8 MODE screen when data is read or READ Read out the data from the SD memory Fy written from or to SD memory cards card ID READ ON Select whether or not to include the saes WRITE OFF CAMERA ID when reading out or writing W SELECT i Select the file number to write in F to the SD memory card USER MENU JON Select whether or not to include the F 8 SELECT R W OFF FILE MENU SELECT settings when WRITE Write the camera recorder s menu data reading out or writing to the SD memory to the SD memory card F card m pE SYSTEM ON Specify whether or not to use the MENU R W OFF settings on all screens except the ee Format the SD memory card SYSTEM MODE screen on the k SYSTEM SETTING page and the 5 settings on the OPTION MENU page S RIRI when data is read or written from or to TITLE READ Read out the title of the data recorded _ JFI SD memory cards the SD i on the SDmemory cara PAINT MENU ON Select whether or not to include the ASEA LEVELR W OFF adjusted values on the PAINT page TITLE1 8 PKK Up to 8 letters can be set for the title when reading out or writing to the SD KKK name
4. LCD Monitor LCD monitor The LCD monitor displays the video in the viewfinder Alternatively it can show clips on the P2 card in a thumbnail format In thumbnail display mode clips can be edited or deleted or P2 cards can be formatted using the 4 THUMBNAIL MENU button and 5 CURSOR and SET buttons OPEN button Used to open the LCD monitor THUMBNAIL button This button switches the content on the 1 LCD monitor from the video in the viewfinder to clip thumbnails Another press switches them back to the video from the viewfinder Note that this switchover is not performed during a recording or playback THUMBNAIL MENU button In thumbnail display mode this button allows you to manipulate the thumbnail menu e g to delete clips 5 CURSOR and SET buttons The four triangular buttons are the CURSOR buttons and the center rectangular one is the SET button They are used to select a thumbnail and manipulate the thumbnail menu For more information see Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails page 100 EXIT button Used to return the display to the previous state when the thumbnail menu or the property screen is dis played Parts and their Functions LCD Monitor Parts and their Functions 25 Viewfinder You can use any of the following viewfinders extra cost options on AJ HPX2000 HD Viewfinders AJ HVF21G selectable between 59 94 and 50 Hz SD Viewfinders AJ VF2O
5. Select whether or not to forcibly disable the audio output when the SAVE ON OFF switch is set to ON ON Disable audio output OFF Enable audio output SAVE SW LCD ON OFF u F Select whether or not to automatically turn off the LCD monitor when the SAVE ON OFF switch is set to ON ON Turn off LCD monitor OFF Do not turn off LCD monitor COMPRESSION MODE Select a compression mode for the 720P mode for 720 59 94P or 720 50P only NORMAL The normal shooting mode is selected DARK Compressed video distortion that occurs in dark areas is lowered which may increase distortion in other areas 142 Menu Menu Description Tables AUTO REC c u F OFF TYPE1 TYPE2 Select the method for detecting REC START STOP marks from the frame rate information in the user bits added through HD SD IN in HD mode in order to automatically start or stop recording for the AJ YA350G an SDI IN option OFF No automatic recording is performed REC START STOP marks are detected from LTC input through HD SDI for automatic recording REC START STOP marks are detected from VITC input through HD SDI for automatic recording TYPE1 TYPE2 Note Set the menu option REC SIGNAL to SDI to input HD SDI signals to the SDI IN connector For information about user bits frame rate information see Setting of the user bits
6. LOOP OP SLOT 13 Audio channel level meter When the MONITOR SELECT CH1 2 CH3 4 switch is set to CH1 2 the meter indicates 1 and 2 as the audio channel numbers together with their audio levels When the switch is set to CH3 4 the meter indicates 3 and 4 as the audio channel numbers together with their audio levels Memory action status indication Error Code Indication for more information see Warning System page 133 Va J Q m EJ ma NDF SLAVE HOLD W HDV GPSY OvER CTL VTCG TIME DATE P REC II TITI ITI IT DAAA OA A A OA h Y minM s D frm MEDIA E mu mm mm m m m m F BATT E mu m m m m m m F gt LOOP OP SLOT 1 T i a o T on oo T SINN o Q oO J Information indication LOOP Stays illuminated in LOOP REC mode For information about the LOOP REC mode see Loop Recording page 33 OP SLOT Remains illuminated when a video encoder card is operated in the optional slot Time code indication NDF Stays illuminated when the time code is in non drop frame mode DF Stays illuminated when the time code is in drop frame mode SLAVE Stays illuminated when the time code is externally locked HOLD Stays illuminated when the time code generator reader value is frozen CTL Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned at CTL to display the CTL count
7. i Features USB2 0 port HOST DEVICE By connecting with a PC via USB2 0 a P2 card inserted in AJ HPX2000 can be used as a bulk storage device It is also possible to store data on a P2 card onto a USB 2 0 connected external hard disk equipped with USB host capability as well as view clips stored on hard disks and write them to P2 cards E DVCPRO IEEE1394 output and DV output pro vided as a standard configuration Data can be input output to an external device through the IEEE1394 digital interface Use a 6 pin type connec tor The unit does not support the bus power W HD SD SDI output featured as standard Video can be output as HD SDI signals down converted SD SDI signals or analog composite signals SDI output includes embedded audio etc Refer to page 36 Note that the SD mode does not output HD SDI signals Hi Down converter output provided as a standard configuration In HD mode the MON OUT output connector and the VIDEO OUT connector in setting VBS mode output down converter analog composite signals It is optimum for confirming shot images on the SD mon itor Refer to page 36 W HD SD SDI input function when the AJ YA350G is attached The camera recorder with the AJ YA350G extension board attached can record SDI signals input through the SDI input connector only if the signals are in the same format as the camera recorder Hi Remote control connector By connecting the remote control unit AJ RC
8. OVR REC view function S BLK It is possible to check a last few B GAMMA seconds of the records taken D ZOOM CAM RET ATW Return video function Y GET It is possible to confirm the return video signals HD analog HD Y DRS signals SD VBS signals supplied to ASSIST the GENKLOCK IN connector on the C TEMP unit by using the viewfinder AUDIO CH1 D ZOOM AUDIO CH2 Digital zoom function REC SW It is possible to enable or disable the RET SW digital zoom function PRE REC Notes SLOT SEL When video signals in a format C U F R PC MODE different from that for the video mode USERTSW _ INH Allocate the USERT button For of the camera recorder return video S GAIN descriptions of the functions see is not properly displayed DS GAIN Assigning Functions to USER MAIN AT E N E USER1 and USER2 Buttons page 44 SETTING page is set to INT the LOVR return video image may be displayed S BLK C U F R as slightly shaking horizontally B GAMMA S BLKLVL OFF For setting the super black level D ZOOM a ATW Y GET C U F R 30 DRS AUTO KNEE ON For selecting ON OFF of the AUTO ASSIST SW OFF KNEE function and DRS function C TEMP DRS When it is set to OFF the AUTO KNEE AUDIO CH1 may not function even if the AUTO AUDIO CH2 KNEE switch is turned ON REC SW When the DRS function is enabled and RET SW the AUTO KNEE switch is positioned to PRE REC slclulF R ON the DRS function turns on SLOT SEL SHD ABB SW JON For the setting to adjust the blac
9. Set ON OFF in META DATA RECORD from the thumbnail menu The factory setting is OFF Selecting the USER CLIP NAME recording method Select META DATA gt USER CLIP NAME from the thumbnail menu to select the recording method Two options are available TYPE1 and TYPE2 e TYPE1 Factory setting USER CLIP NAME to be recorded If clip metadata has been read in Uploaded data If no clip metadata has been read in or if the setting for recording clip metadata has been turned off Same as GLOBAL CLIP ID UMID data TYPE2 USER CLIP NAME to be recorded Uploaded data COUNT value If clip metadata has been read in If no clip metadata has been read in or if the setting for recording clip metadata has been turned off Same as CLIP NAME The COUNT value is indicated as a four digit number The COUNT value is incremented each time a new clip is captured if clip metadata has been read in and TYPE2 has been selected as the recording method The COUNT value can be reset using the following procedure Select PROPERTY DEVICE META DATA from the thumbnail menu then select USER CLIP NAME to display the menu shown below Select COUNT RESET with the cursor and press the SET button to reset the COUNT value to 1 META DATA REC META DATA REC ON META NAME TEST DA CREATOR Ler DD Are DERSON LOAD DATA TEST CLIP COUNT 0001 REC DATA TEST CLIP
10. Note If a clip is written back to a P2 card different from the original card that contained that clip then the clip may be incomplete If this is the case reconnect the clip For more information see Reconnection of Incomplete Clips page 108 Direction for using a hard disc drive A hard disc drive must be used under the following conditions It must meet the operating requirements e g temperature It must not be placed in an instable place or a place exposed to vibrations Some hard disc drives do not operate properly Do not remove the cable or the target P2 card or turn off the camera recorder or hard disc drive during formatting or copying Doing so requires the camera recorder and the hard disc drive to be reactivated Since hard disc drives are high precision devices there is a high possibility that they may become incapable of writing data depending on the conditions of use Take note that we will not be liable for loss of data caused by failed hard disc drives or any other problem as well as direct or indirect damages resulting from the loss of data We do not guarantee that hard disc drives will operate properly with the camera recorder or that the data on them will be properly retained if data copied to them from the camera recorder has been replaced with other data using a PC 1 24 Connection with external device Connection with external devices using the USB 2 0 port Connection using th
11. The input signals to be recorded on Audio Channels 1 2 3 and 4 are selected with the AUDIO IN switch For more information see Audio input Function Section page 14 AUDIO SELECT CH1 CH2 switch Display window MONITOR CH1 3 I ST CH2 4 selector switch MONITOR SELECT CH1 2 CH3 4 selector switch LEVEL CH1 AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 CH2 controls CH3 CH4 buttons In SD mode DVCPRO50 DVCPRO or DV with 480i or 576i your unit is factory set to perform no recording on Audio Channels 3 and 4 in the DVCPRO and DV formats To enable four channel recording the menu option 25M REC CH SEL must be set to 4CH Notes Audio Channels 1 and 2 always receive the signals selected with the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches Four channel recorded audio signals are SDl output as they are Specific audio settings are performed through the lt MIC AUDIO1 gt and lt MIC AUDIO2 gt screens which are accessible from the MAIN OPERATION page For more information see MAIN OPERATION page 163 lt MIC AUDIO1 gt FRONT VR CH1 OFF FRONT VR CH2 OFF MIC LOWCUT CH1 OFF MIC LOWCUT CH2 OFF MIC LOWCUT CH3 OFF MIC LOWCUT CH4 OFF LIMITER CH1 OFF LIMITER CH2 OFF AUTO LEVEL CH3 ON AUTO LEVEL CH4 ON 25M REC CH SEL 2CH TEST TONE NORMAL lt MIC AUDIO2 gt FRONT MIC POWER ON REAR MIC POWER ON MONITOR SELECT STEREO FRONT MIC LEVEL 4 01B REAR MIC CH1 LEVE
12. This lamp indicates the active status of the SD memory card It stays illuminated when the card is active Note While the lamp is on do not insert or remove the card 20 Parts and their Functions Shooting and Recording Playback Functions Section Menu Operation Section 1 MENU button Used to turn on off the menu 2 JOG dial button With the menu open this button is used to navigate through menu pages select options and specify values For directions on manipulating the menu see Setting Menu Options page 139 3 SD memory card insertion slot An SD memory card optional accessory is inserted here It is used when writing or saving menu data or lens files on an SD memory card 4 BUSY operation mode display lamp This lamp indicates the active status of the SD memory card It stays illuminated when the card is active Note While the lamp is on do not insert or remove the card 5 Shot Mark Cancel Menu button Undoes any changes to the menu option settings if pressed during the changes Parts and their Functions Menu Operation Section Parts and their Functions 21 Time Code Section GENLOCK IN connector BNC This connector is used to input a reference signal before the camera unit is gen locked or before the time code is externally locked TC IN connector BNC This connector is used to input a reference time code when you externally lock the time co
13. n 1 to 5 which indicates Slots 1 5 UPDATING Indicated when the camera recorder is updating the screen or reading data When the screen is being updated the rotating icon amp is indicated Please refer to Switching the Thumbnail Display page 104 for more information 2 Slot numbers and HDD status This section indicates on which P2 card the pointed clip is recorded The number of the slot that contains the appropriate P2 card is indicated in yellow If the clip is recorded on more than one P2 card then the numbers of all slots that contain the appropriate cards are indicated The numbers of the other slots are shown in white if they contain P2 cards The USB HDD section is indicated as follows Other than the USB HOST mode gray Not connected in USB HOST mode gray HDD recognized and usable in USB HOST mode white HDD recognized and thumbnails shown in USB HOST mode yellow HDD recognized and data unable to be copied in USB HOST red 3 Time Display You can set this to display the time code at the start of clip recording the user bits at the start of clip recording the shooting time the shooting date the shooting and date or USER CLIP NAME 4 Recording mode The recording mode for the clip on which the pointer is located is indicated 5 System format The format for the clip on which the pointer is located is indicated Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Manipulating Clips w
14. playback Stop recording or playback operation Countermeasures Replace the affected P2 card 12 FAN STOP Display window indication One of the bars for remaining MEDIA capacity starts blinking Display window indication No display WARNING lamp Blinks once per second while recording continues Tally lamp Blinks once per second while recording continues Viewfinder The P2 card remaining capacity indicator blinks Warning tone Beeps once per second while recording continues Warning The total remaining capacity of all the P2 description cards is two minutes or less Recording playback Continues to operate operation C nterm as r s Replace the cards If there is an empty card slot insert a new card WARNING lamp Blinks 4 times per second Tally lamp No display Viewfinder The FAN STOP indicator blinks while recording continues Warning tone It does not sound Warning The fan is at rest because something is description wrong with it If the camera recorder operates with the fan Recording stopped then the temperature inside rises playback While the camera recorder continues to operation operate clips may not be recorded or played back properly Immediately stop using the camera recorder Countermeasures and consult your distributor Maintenance and Inspections Maintenance and Inspect
15. setup files on the SD memory card To revise the set SD CARD READ WRITE SD CARD READ WRITE READ WRITE value SCENE z WAITE SCENE file No of files 4 SCENE eae ee CURRENT data ae Operating status of the unit WRITE USER READ USER No of files 1 a LENS FILE DATA DATA READ o lt USER data K LENS file LENS FILE No of files 1 WRITE No of files 8 READ FACTORY DATA FACTORY data e Revision disable LENS FILE CARD P W LENS FILE CARD R W No of files 1 READ WRITE Files built in the unit Menu operations Setting Data Using an SD memory card SD memory card i Lens file No of files 8x8 It is possible to write eight titles for eight lens files on the SD memory card An SD memory card optional accessory can be used as a setup card that stores up to eight files of settings menu specifications This data allows you to quickly reproduce an optimum state Regarding SD memory cards please see lt Cautions in using SD memory cards gt page 20 74 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data B Handling SD memory cards An SD memory card may be inserted or removed either before or after the power is turned on To insert an SD memory card Open the lid of the switc
16. 1 a T f SPE j W o T 1 ob oo T Q Oo a Battery remaining level indication bar For a battery with a digital indicator percentage indication if the remaining level of the battery is higher than 70 all seven segments up to the F position are lit When the remaining level falls below 70 the segments go out one by one for each drop of 10 All seven segments can be set to light up when the battery remaining balance is 100 To do so select 100 for the menu option BATT REMAIN FULL in the lt BATTERY P2CARD gt screen of the MAIN OPERATION page Mode indication W Stays illuminated when the camera recorder operates in SD mode 480 59 94i 576 50i and is set to 16 9 mode HD Stays illuminated when the camera recorder is in HD mode 1080i 720P DV Stays illuminated when the recording playback format is DV GPS Stays illuminated when radio waves are not received during GPS operation GPS Y Stays illuminated when radio waves are received during GPS operation P REC Stays illuminated when the PRE REC MODE is set to ON and blinks when recording is continued after the recording tally lamp has gone out NDF SLAVE HOLD W mae On N CTL VTCG TIME DATE P REC lt TITI TITI I ITI DAAA OAA AA h Y minM s D frm Bs MEDIA E mu mm mm mm ee F BATT E mu m m m m m m F
17. 13 T Text Memo Indicator This marker is displayed for a clip with a text memo attached 14 E Edit Copied Clip Indicator This indicator accompanies clips edit copied by models that support edit copying For more information about edit copying see the instruction manual for a mode that supports edit copying 15 W Wide Clip Indicator This marker is displayed for clips recorded with the 16 9 aspect ratio However it does not accompany clips in HD format 102 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Thumbnail Screen Selecting Thumbnails Multiple thumbnails can be randomly selected in the thumbnail screen 1 Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer yellow frame to the desired clip and press the SET button The frame around the selected thumbnail changes to a blue frame Press the SET button again to deselect the clip 2 Additional clips can be selected by repeating Step 1 It is possible to display only the selected thumbnails in the thumbnail screen for playback Please refer to Switching the Thumbnail Display page 104 for more information 1 LCD Monitor THUMBNAIL Button EXIT Button ADY CURSOR Buttons _ SET Button Playing back Clips Press the THUMBNAIL button The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the desired clip Press the PLAY PAUSE button and the clip under the pointer will be played back on the LCD monitor After
18. Adjustable Data Saved Piles Remarks Data Saved Range reman PAG L95 bk Enable selection under BATTERY NiCd14 X Enable selection under BAT TERY SELECT SELECT Enable selection x Enable selection e Disable selection e Disable selection AUTO Select auto or manual to set the NEAR NEAR END 11 0 Set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 V MANUAL END voltage 138 steps AUTO Set voltage automatically a MANUAL Set voltage manually 15 0 11 0 When MANUAL is selected in the menu END 11 0 Set the END voltage in 0 1 V steps above set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 13 5 V steps 13 4 leJulF 15 2 C U F 115 0 BP GL65 95 X Enable selection under BATTERY TYPE A bs Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT SELECT Enable selection gt Enable selection e Disable selection e Disable selection AUTO Select auto or manual to set the NEAR FULL 2 0 Set the voltage to display the FULL MANUAL END voltage i5 1 indication in 0 1 V steps AUTO Set voltage automatically anes S MANUAL Set voltage manually 17 0 gt 11 0 When MANUAL is selected in the menu NEAR END 11 0 Set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 V above set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 steps 13 5 V steps 13 6 JcJulF 15 2 5 0 END 11 0 Set the END voltage in 0 1 V steps 12 9 C U F 15 0 TYPE B Ed Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT x Enable selection e Disable selection FULL 2 0 Set the voltage to display the FULL is 9 indication in 0 1
19. After the operation in process format the card WRITENG The card is not writable CARD FULL because it has no free space Delete unwanted files or replace the card with a new one 13 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES R SELECT READ W SELECT WRITE CARD CONFIG TITLE READ RRR RE RRR ERE RRR RE RRR RR RE 10 Press the JOG dial button to return the cursor to the option TITLE 1 1 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option WRITE 12 Press the JOG dial button to display the following message cr WRITE MGS gt PESIS TITLE Then press the dial button When the data has been written the following message appears WRITE OK 14 To exit the menu press the MENU button The settings menu disappears and the status of the unit is indicated at the top and bottom of the viewfinder screen Note The SD CARD R W SELECT screen can be used to select the type of the menu to be written on the SD memory card Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data Adjustments and Settings for Recording 11 To read data on an SD memory card 1 Navigate the menu to the lt SD CARD READ WRITE gt screen To select a file number 2 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the menu option R SELECT Then press the dial button lt SD CARD READ WRITE gt gt R SELECT s
20. For locking the HD SDI signals to the GENLOCK input For the down converter output signals the start position of the video delays by about 90 lines COMPOSIT For locking the down converter output signals to the GENLOCK input For the HD SDI output signals the start position of the video gains by about 90 lines In the unit there is a video signal delay in the camera which is required or the process of converting video images taken with the image shooting element from the progressive signals to the interlace signals Since time is required for making the 2 3 pull down from the 24P frame there is a video signal delay in the camera When recording from a device that can record images without a delay and the unit is connected in parallel it is necessary to synchronize the time code To set this timing open the lt TC UB gt screen from the VTR MENU page and set it in the TC VIDEO SYNCRO item Set by referring to the connection example Setting of the TC VIDEO SYNCRO item Variable Remarks range Item TC VIDEO SYNCRO 0 For setting to correct the time code 1 according to the delay of video 2 signals 3 0 Do not correct 1 To delay the time code to be input according to the timing of the video images 2 To forward the time code to be output according to the timing of the video images 3 To delay the time code to be input and forward the time code to be output respectively according to
21. Z a E 5 re H z a 2 O D S 5 5 2 Z Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Selecting Thumbnails 1083 Switching the Thumbnail Display The display can be switched so that only those clips matching the specified conditions are displayed in the thumbnail screen EXIT 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button Close the sub menu The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor 2 Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button The thumbnail menu appears THUMBNAIL MENU button 3 Select THUMBNAIL from the thumbnail menu Switch the thumbnail display by selecting one of the following items ALL CLIP SAME FORMAT CLIPS SEIETAN SELECTED CLIPS J 08 MARKED CLIPS BL TEXT MEMO CLIPS f SLOT CLIPS SETUP EXIT 00 04 48 26 00 06 47 11 ALL CLIP Display all clips SAME FORMAT CLIPS Displays clips in the same format as the system format SELECTED CLIPS Display randomly selected clips MARKED CLIPS Display clips with shot marks attached TEXT MEMO CLIPS Display clips with text memo data attached SLOT CLIPS Display clips recorded in the P2 card inserted in the specified slot When this item is selected SLOT1 to SLOT5 are displayed as a sub menu Select the desired slot to display the clips SETUP Please refer to Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode page 114 for information about this item 104 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Switching the Thumbnail Display Shot Mark A shot mark c
22. 110 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Setting of Clip Meta Data Note When a P2 card with a memory capacity of 8 GB or more is used in camera recorder and a one time continuous recording exceeds the prescribed duration approx 5 minutes for DVCPRO HD approx 10 minutes for DVCPRO5O0 or approx 20 minutes for DVCPRO or DV or when a one time recording extends over more than one P2 card the recording concerned will automatically be undertaken as a separate clip At this time each clip will be provided with its own COUNT value Example of recording DVCPRO HD a clip on one P2 card REC start recording start REC PAUSE recording pause Recording duration Approx 7 min Y Clip 1 Clip 2 COUNT value COUNT value 0001 0002 I l l m 5 min gt et amn Example of recording a clip on two P2 cards REC start recording start REC PAUSE recording pause l v v Clip 1 Clip 2 COUNT value COUNT value 0003 0004 l l 1st card 2nd card a If the clip thumbnails are displayed as shown in the example above or their properties are indicated using a P2 device the thumbnail and COUNT value of clip 1 will be displayed Clear the uploaded metadata Select META DATA INITIALIZE from the thumbnail menu and press the SET button Select YES when the confirmation screen is displayed Setting the language for metadata The language for metadata is selectable To specify a language select METADATA gt
23. CHARA OFF output signals from the MON OUT connector ON To superimpose OFF Not to superimpose Note This does not link with the VIDEO OUT CHARACTER switch Adjustments and Settings for Recording Selection of video output signals Adjustments and Settings for Recording 73 Handling data Set data file configuration The unit employs 5 sets for the file data area FACTORY data The area for storing factory settings Data cannot be revised with menu operations USER data The area for storing the data set by menu operations The FACTORY data is stored as the factory setting CURRENT data The area for storing the operating status of the unit The set value in this area is revised by menu operations SCENE file Four sets of scene files are provided LENS file Eight sets of lens files are provided For menu items that can be read from or stored in the respective areas refer to Menu page 137 Notes For information about how to navigate through the menu for this section see Setting Menu Options page 139 Access the respective data settings files after switching the PC MODE to OFF If the respective data settings files are accessed when the unit is in USB DEVICE mode an error may occur The PC MODE can be operated from the lt SYSTEM MODE gt screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page It is possible to write eight SD memory card SET UP data No of files 8 Menu operations
24. F memory card Sia PAINT MENU JON Select whether or not to include the set SW m RW OFF values on the PAINT MENU page when reading out or writing to the memory Note di i hee o card For a USB DEVICE mode errors occur even if the respective items for SD CARD READ WRITE are VF MENU ON Select whether or not to include the set R W OFF values on the VF page when reading out executed since it does not access an SD memory card aiae or writing to the SD memory card Set PC MODE to OFF and then execute the operation CAM OPE ON Select whether or not to include the set again MENU RW OFF values on the CAM OPERATION page when reading out or writing to the SD F memory card MAINOPE JON Select whether or not to include the set MENU R W OFF values on the MAIN OPERATION page when reading out or writing to the SD est asl s memory card MAINTE ON Select whether or not to include the set MENU R W OFF values on the MAINTENANCE page when reading out or writing to the SD ea es memory card The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode Menu Menu Description Tables 169 LENS FILE SCENE Items Adjustable R marke It
25. LED WHITE BALANCE MODE USER SW GAIN Opening the Menus Ls LENSARIS USER MENU MAIN OPERATION BATTERY P2CARD Displayed when the MENU BATTERY SETTING1 tton is pr FILE SD CARD READ WRITE BATTERY SETTING2 button is pressed IL SDCARDRW SELECT Mo z LENS FILE MAIN MENU LENS FILE CARD RAW TC UB Displayed when the MENU SCENE L UMID SET INFO button is pressed for at least 3 INITIALIZE seconds MAINTENANCE SYSTEM CHECK LENS ADJ OPTION MENU L USER MENU SELECT SYSTEMSETTING USER H BLACK SHADING j PAINT USER WHITE SHADING Displayed when the MENU VF USER LENS FILE ADJ button is pressed while pressing IL CAM OPE USER DIAGNOSTICI the LIGHT button MAIN OPE USER DIAGNOSTIC2 m FILE USER HOURS METER L MAINTENANCE USER Notes The items highlighted in grey cannot be selected by lt USER MENU SELECT gt The underlined items can only be selected as one whole page with all sub items Individual sub items cannot be selected separately About Menu Description Tables The following letters indicate whether the modified menu Items Adjustable data is saved to or read out from the memory Data Saved Range The indicates that the data cannot be saved or read REC SIGNAL Remarks Select video input signals CAM Record the signal from the camera VIDEO Record the signal from the S Can be saved and read as scene data file
26. Select the time code to be output to the time code output connector TCG Always output time code generator value TCG TCR Display time code generator value in recording mode and time code reader value in playback mode TC DISP SEL SOF 24F c u F Select the display format for the time code frame digits For 1080 59 94i 720 59 94P or 480 59 94i only 30F Display time code frame digits in 30 frames 24F Convert time code frame digits into 24 frames for display TC VIDEO SYNCRO on O For setting to correct the time code according to the delay of video signals 0 Do not correct 1 To delay the time code to be input according to the timing of the video images 2 To forward the time code to be output according to the timing of the video images 3 To delay the time code to be input and forward the time code to be output respectively according to the timing of the video images For details refer to Externally Locking the Time Code page 54 168 Menu Menu Description Tables Indicate the product ID number Note Please refer to Setting UMID Information page 59 for the UMID information setting The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode Fite
27. Switch changeover indication WHITE x x K AUTO KNEE ON OFF GAIN dB SS 1 6 gt SS gt 1 6 KK FILTER gt K EXTENDER ON OFF The WHITE BAL switch has been switched is replaced with A B or PRST When A and B are set to VAR then it is indicated as VAR K When B is assigned ATW then it is indicated as ATW MODE AUTO KNEE switch has been switched to ON or OFF Gain has been switched with the GAIN selector switch or a user button When the shutter speed has been switched the shutter speed is indicated Shutter speed is in SYNCRO SCAN mode Filter position and detail have been switched Lens extender has been turned on or off IRIS xx F x Indicated when the iris override correction value is to be changed Low light warning LOW LIGHT Brightness too low Y GET value KKK Yo With the Y GET ON setting the output brightness level near the center marker is displayed as MARKER indication MKR A B OFF Current marker type 12 User button functions UM USER MAIN button U1 USER1 button U2 USER2 button INH S GAIN gt gt dB OFF DS GAIN gt gt 1 OFF LINE MIX ON OFF S IRIS ON OFF OVR ON OFF S BLK OFF B GAMMA ON OFF AUDIO CH1 AUDIO CH2 REC SW Y GET ON RET SW ATW ON OFF D ZOOM x 2 x 3 x 4 OFF SLOT SEL PRE REC USB HOST DEVICE OFF DRS ON OFF ASSIST ON OFF C TEMP User buttons disabled Selected S GAIN Selected D
28. TC User Bits UB Shooting Time TIME Shooting Date DATE Shooting Time and Date Time DATE or USER CLIP NAME The factory setting is Time Code DATE FORMAT You can specify the display order for the shooting date as either Year Month Day YMD Month Day Year MDY or Day Month Year DMY The factory setting is Month Day Year This setting is reflected in the recording date shown in the clip property and the shooting date shown when DATE is selected under the item DATA DISPLAY 114 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode Properties The clip s properties and the P2 card s status are displayed clip Property From the thumbnail menu select PROPERTY CLIP PROPERTY The following screen appears PROPERTY USER CLIP NAME z VOICE MEMO 0 viDEO TEXT MEMO AUDIO ACCESS 00 00 00 00 DEVICE 00000000 2006 AUG 03 SHOOT 15 20 53 GMT 09 00 SCENARIO 00 02 17 17 NEWS DV25_411 MEMO 59 94i 1 Clip Number 2 Thumbnail 3 Clip Information Indicates the indicators added to the clip and the number of text and voice memos added to the clip The A mark appears if the clip is recorded on a write protected P2 card Note AJ HPX2000 is not capable of recording or playing back voice memos E P2 Card Status Display Clip Information Displays detailed information about the clip CLIP NAME Display clip names START TC The time code v
29. TCG Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned at TC or UB to display the TC or UB generator value TC Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned at TC or UB to display the TC or UB reader value VTCG Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned at UB to display the VIUB generator value VTC Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned at UB to display the VIUB reader value TIME Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned at UB to display the real time hour minute and second DATE Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned at UB to display the real time date No Indication The CTL VTCG TIME and DATE stay off when the DISPLAY switch is positioned at UB to display real time time zone hour and minute Time count indication The time code CTL user bits and real time are shown Note When the DISPLAY switch is positioned at UB each press of the HOLD button changes the indication through VTCG VTC gt DATE TIME No Indication Time Zone gt TCG TC in that order 24 Parts and their Functions Display Window Functions Positions of time code related switches and information provided Position of Position of TCG information item DISPLAY switch switch SET Time code CTL F RUN or R RUN CTL TC Time code F RUN SET R RUN User bits or real UB time time zone
30. WHITE CLIP 90 Set WHITE CLIP LEVEL The gain in the dark section is higher LVL than the HD gamma 109 FILM LIKE1 sIclUIFIR The cinema gamma characteristics _ for video applications are selected A KNEE 80 Set the AUTO KNEE POINT position in FILM LIKE2 POINT 53 1 steps This setting is enabled when The cinema gamma characteristics ae the OUTPUT AUTO KNEE selector for video applications are selected 107 switch is set to CAM AUTO KNEE ON In this setting gradations in highlit S C U F R areas can be expressed better than when FILM LIKE1 is selected A KNEE LVL 100 Set the AUTO KNEE LEVEL FILM LIKE3 107 The cinema gamma characteristics PA for video applications are selected C U F R 109 In this setting gradations in highlit A KNEE 1 Set the AUTO KNEE response speed areas can be expressed better than RESPONSE The smaller the setting value the faster S C U F R when FILM LIKE2 is selected eS the response speed s c u F R s FILM LIKE1 Note The items indicated by are the setting items for PAINT MENU SW m R W in the lt SD CARD R W SELECT gt screen The items without E are the setting items for PAINT MENU LEVEL R W Please refer to SD CARD R W SELECT page 169 for more information 152 Menu Menu Description Tables FILM LIKE3 FILM LIKE2 Video level Luminance When the GAMMA MODE SEL item is used for FILM LIKES the following settings are recommended MANUAL KNEE ON KNEE POINT gt 85 0
31. When the input from the IEEE1394 interface is being received regardless of the menu setting and or the switch position on camera recorder the timecode and the user bits in the VAUX area input from the DVCPRO DV connector are always recorded on the P2 card Recording of UMID Unique Material Identifier information When the input from the IEEE1394 interface is being received the UMID information input from the DVCPRO DV connector will be recorded on the P2 card If there is no UMID information it will be generated in the unit and recorded When the camera recorder is operating in the DV mode the UMID information is not recorded 118 Connection with external device Connection through the DVCPRO DV connector E External device control through 1394 connection The DVCPRPO DV connector can be connected with an external device for recording backup copies to control the start and stop of recording 1 When connecting the 1394 DV cable see 32 DVCPRO DV connector page 20 Set the 1394 CONTROL menu option on the 1394 SETTING screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page to BOTH 2 Through the 1394 CMD SEL menu option select the type of stop recording command to be received by the external device 3 Through the REC TALLY menu option on the OPTION MODE screen select how the recording status of the camera recorder should be indicated Note that the recording status of the external device is indicated with a red tally LED Not
32. for 3200K position Ach and Bch is retained for the 8000K If the automatic adjustment of white C U F R respective CC filters balance is executed in the B position SHOCKLESS OFF For setting the length of time for the color temperature at that time is AWB FAST transiting to the switched position of memorized in the position of the WHITE NORMAL _ white balance when the position of the BAL switch B If the white balance has SLOW1 WHITE BAL switch is changed been automatically adjusted or the CC SLOW2 OFF To transit instantly filter has been switched then up to SLOW3 FAST About 1 second _ _ _ Fl 9000K may be indicated NORMAL About 2 seconds SLOW1 About 3 seconds SLOW2 About 10 seconds The ___in the Adjustable Range column indicates the _IclulFIR SLOW3 About 20 seconds preset mode f 03 Menu Menu Description Tables 161 USER SW GAIN LENS IRIS Items Adjustable Remarka Items Adjustable Reirh rke Data Saved Range Data Saved Range S GAIN x Select whether or not to enable 30aB for A IRIS LEVEL 000 Set the target value for auto iris 30 dB SUPER GAIN Enabl
33. ke TITLE1 ke TITLE2 TERETERE TITLES TEETER TITLES 4 Press the JOG dial button to accept the scene file 5 Turn the JOG dial button to return the cursor to the option WRITE lt SCENE gt READ USER DATA SCENE SEL oa READ gt WRITE RESET kek TITLE1 ke TITLE2 kee TITLES kek TITLE4 6 Press the JOG dial button to display the following message z WRITE VES ote Pyryys TITLE 80 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data 7 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES Then press the dial button This writes the setting data into the scene file area of the unit internal memory 8 To exit the menu press the MENU button To read settings data for scene files 1 Navigate the menu to the lt SCENE gt screen 2 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option SCENE SEL 3 Press the JOG dial button to blink scene file numbers Then turn the dial button to select a desired scene file number lt SCENE gt READ USER DATA SCENE SEL Sal READ WRITE RESET TITLE1 tetereee TITLE2 teteeeee TITLE3 tetereee TITLE4 2 Peete 4 Press the JOG dial button to accept the scene file 5 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the READ option lt SCENE gt READ USER DATA SCENE SEL 4 READ WRITE RESET TITLE1 teteeeee TITLE2 teternee TITLE3
34. ot eteeeee TITLE4 teeters XL 6 Press the JOG dial button to display the following message READ here Arras gt XL 7 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES Then press the dial button The data stored in the scene file area of the internal memory of the unit is read to complete the setting 8 To exit the menu press the MENU button To return data for scene files to their defaults 1 Navigate the menu to the lt SCENE gt screen 2 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option SCENE SEL 3 Press the JOG dial button to blink scene file numbers Then turn the dial button to select the scene file that you want to reset lt SCENE gt READ USER DATA SCENE SEL aA READ WRITE RESET TITLE1 otetereee TITLED teteeeee TITLE3 tetereee TITLE4 ttt 4 Press the JOG dial button to accept the scene file 5 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option RESET lt SCENE gt READ USER DATA SCENE SEL a READ WRITE gt RESET TITLE1 teteeeee TITLE 2 teteenee TITLE3 ot eteeeee TITLES FP OR eee C 6 Press the JOG dial button to display the following message RESET YES yaar gt N0 gt Xu 7 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES Then press the dial button The data stored in the scene file area of the internal memory of the unit is reset to the default
35. page 49 The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode REC FUNCTION OUTPUT SEL Items Adjustable Remarks Items Adjustable Rem rka Data Saved Range Data Saved Range PRE REC ON Select whether or not to enable PRE OUTPUT ITEMIMENU ONLY Set the character contents MODE OFF RECORDING TC superimposed onto the output signals ON PRE RECORDING enabled STATUS for the VIDEO OUT connector Analog OFF PRE RECORDING disabled or SDI and MON OUT connector Note MENU ONLY Specify the PRE RECORDING time by Displays only when the menu IelulFl using the menu option PRE REC TIME characters are superimposed No display appears when other characters PRE REC 1SEC Set PRE RECORDING are superimposed TIME 1 15SEC TC Display the time code Displays the 8SEC Set the length of time that can be menu when menu characters are retrospectively recorded before the superimposed 15SEC REC START button is pressed Note Note i The TC display position moves up When the SYSTEM MODE menu option and down depending on the camera on the SYSTEM MODE screen is set to ID position 1080 59 94i 1080 50i 720 59 94P or STATUS 720 50P or when it is set to 480 59 94i Display the same characters or 576
36. screen from the MAINTENANCE page and adjust the flare in the LENS R FLARE item the LENS G FLARE item and the LENS B FLARE item gt lt LENS FILE ADJ gt RB GAIN CTRL RESET ON LENS R GAIN OFFSET 000 LENS B GAIN OFFSET 000 LENS R LENS G LENS B FLARE FLARE FLARE 2000 000 2000 Example of the chart for flare adjustment Adjustment of gain offset For correcting changes in white balance that may occur when replacing the lens Mount the lens as standard on the unit Shoot the grayscale chart with appropriate lighting 2000 Ix 3200 K are preferable Set the WHITE BAL switch to the A position Adjust the lens aperture so that the white window at the center of the grayscale chart is about 80 Push the AUTO W B BAL switch to AWB to adjust the white balance automatically Measure the signal level of RGB by using the waveform monitor WFM Replace the lens to one where a lens file is provided FN DOD GQ AQ NS Adjust the lens aperture so that the signal level of Gch isthe same signal level as the one obtained in 6 above 9 Using the menu operations open the lt LENS FILE ADJ gt screen from the MAINTENANCE page and set the RB GAIN CTRL RESET to ON 10 Adjust the signal level of Rch to be the same as Gch in the LENS R OFFSET item 1 1 In the same way adjust the signal level of Bch to be the same as Gch in the LENS B OFFSET item Adjustments and Settings for
37. the timing of the video images Example 3 When the unit and an external device are locked to the external time code generator which is connected externally and when simultaneous recording is made by using the TC OUT output signals Reference video signal External time code generator Device that records images without a delay Settings of the TC VIDEO SYNCRO item 1 MON OUT or VIDEO OUT VIDEO IN SDI IN HD SDI IN Example 4 When the unit and an external device are locked to the external time code generator and when several units of the camera are connected in a cascade configuration Reference video signal External time code generator EN CIC Ci Ch Tes Ag Aa 0080 TC OUT Device that records images without a delay y AJ HPX2000 1st unit Settings of the TC VIDEO SYNCRO item 1 AJ HPX2000 2nd unit and later Settings of the TC VIDEO SYNCRO item 0 Settings of the TC VIDEO SYNCRO item 0 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting Time Data Adjustments and Settings for Recording 55 Example 5 Example 6 When an external device is locked to the time code When an external device is locked to the time code generator of the unit generator of camera recorder which is connected in a cascade configuration To be connected if ne
38. to playback instantly Seamless playback of selected clips You can select more than one clip from the thumbnail view for continuous playback and output of seamless video Note During continuous playback of clips in different record ing formats seamless playback is not available Display of clip information By selecting clips information added to clips such as the recording time Text Memo Shot Marks and metadata can be checked Hi Text Memos amp Shot Marks Wi Recording Time Each clip can incorporate comments in the form of text memo added to the thumbnail associated with the time code together with shot marks which for example can Recording Time on P2 Cards Number of cards used 1 Recording Format help you distinguish OK cuts from reject cuts Card No DVCPRO DVCPROSO sae ren Both text memos and shot marks can be added to Audio 2ch Audio 4ch Audio la selected clips during and after a recording This is help ful for editing recorded video AJ P2C004HG Approx Approx Approx In addition you can use the copy function for each text 1e minutes S minutes F minutes memo block to take only the necessary portions out of a AJ P2C008HG Approx Approx Approx clip 32 minutes 16 minutes 8 minutes F For more information see the instruction manual for the 2 i Front mounted Sound Level Control Mechanism appropriate memory card S AJ HPX2000 features a front mounted control
39. 05 Menu Menu Description Tables 155 VF INDICATOR1 VF INDICATOR2 Items Adjustable Remarks Items Adjustable Reinarks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range EXTENDER JON For selecting ON or OFF for the P2CARD OFF Select the indication mode for the P2 OFF extender display REMAIN ONE CARD card s remaining capacity ICIU FIR TOTAL OFF Disable the remaining capacity SHUTTER ON Set the shutter speed indication to ON neication OFF or OFF ONE CARD Display the remaining capacity of the C U F R P2 card currently used for recording FILTER ON Set the filter No indication to ON or TOTAL Display the total remaining OFF OFF _IclulFIR capacity of all P2 cards in slots C U F R i BATTERY ON Set the battery voltage indication to ON WHITE ON Set the AWB PRE A B indication to ON OFF or OFF OFF or OFF IelulFIR C U F R f AUDIOLVL JON Set the audio lever meter indication to GAIN ON For selecting ON OFF of the gain OFF ON or OFF OFF currently selected S GAIN DS GAIN IelulFIR IC U FIR and LINE MIX GAIN displays f ENES TC OFF Select the time code to display IRIS OFF OFF Disable indications of both the TCG OFF Disable the time code display IRIS super iris ON status and the iris TCR TCG Display the time code generator SIRIS value x TCG TCR value in recording mode S IRIS Enable only the iris value TCR Display t
40. 1080 23 98P 1080 59 94i 2 3 Pull down The white balance is automatically adjusted in real time 1080 23 98PA 1080 59 94i 2 3 3 2 Pull down according to the subject This is effective for urgent 1080 501 recording where you can t spare the time to make an ib 108026 1080 50i adjustment through the auto white balance feature vege 720 59 94P i DRS Dynamic Range Stretcher function 120 29 91P The dynamic range can be streched by compressing the 720 23 98P 720 59 94P 2 3 Pull down video signal level of a part with high brightness where 720 50P DSE white color skipping phenomena occur during ordinary 720 25P shooting Refer to page 44 480 59 94i ERN 18002007P 480 59 94i H Film like Gamma function 480 23 98P 480 59 94i 2 3 Pull down The unit employs three types of film like gamma to eas SD ily obtain film tones accumulated through Varicam AJ 490 23 38PA 480 99 941 2 3 3 2 Pulldown HDC27 series so that a wide range of image impres 576 50i S70 sions can be reproduced for production Refer to page 576 25P 152 E 14 bit A D conversion digital signal processing H Lens file function Analog video signals are processed into digital data by a The unit has 8 lens files 14 bit A D converter with sampling frequencies of 74 By using an SD memory card 64 lens files can be MHZ It is possible to reproduce images that are more stored Refer to page 83 finely detailed Wi Focus assist function W Storage type high sensitivity function DS GA
41. 12V DC IN Socket Notes If both the battery pack and the external DC power supply are connected the electric power is supplied from the external DC power supply While the external DC power supply is used the battery can be mounted and removed on from the unit When the external DC power supply is used ensure that the power switch of the external DC power supply is turned on first and then the POWER switch on the unit is turned on In the case of the reverse operation a malfunction may occur on the unit since the output voltage of the external DC power supply is raised slowly Preparation Power Supply 971 Preparation Mounting the lens and Performing the Flange Back and White Shading Adjustments Mounting the Lens 1 Raise the lens clamping lever and remove the mount cap Lens Clamping Lever Mount Cap 2 To mount the lens align the indentation at the top center of the lens mount with the center mark of the lens 4 Secure the cable through the cable clamp and plug it into the LENS connector LENS Connector 5 Adjust the lens flange back Notes Please refer to the lens instruction manual for guidance on lens handling When the lens is removed install the mount cap to protect the device Adjusting the Lens Flange Back If images are not clearly focused at both telephoto and wide angle positions during zoom operations adjust the flange back distance from the lens mounting sur
42. 2 eliminated FRAME RATE FRMRATE For setting the user bits to record when UB MENU the video system is set to 24P or 24PA or when the recording format is set to 720P For details refer to Recording time code and user bits page 49 FRM RATE For recording the shooting information frame rate etc of the camera MENU This follows the settings in the UB MODE item and the VITC UB MODE item of lt TC UB gt Tel TT screen 1394 CONFIG DFLT 000 This is the menu for expanding the 001 DVCPRO DV connector Use with DFLT in normal operation 255 ee 1394 GAP 0 For setting the interval between packets COUNT io C 63 AUDIO OUT DELAYED Select whether or not to delay audio DELAY THROUGH headphone and speaker outputs DELAYED Delay audio output in synchronisation with video output THROUGH Output audio input without delay This setting prevents echo effect between the sound source and audio output when the sound source is near the C camera recorder FAN MODE OFF For setting the operation mode of the fan AUTO OFF The fan always stops AUTO The fan will run automatically when the temperature in the unit increases Note Once the power is turned off this will always be set to AUTO whenever the power is turned on If the unit is operated as the fan stops the temperature in the unit will increase and data may not record or play back properly Use the unit after setting this ics falas item to AUTO for
43. 60i through 8 SDI i optional 60i cam 2 a Ach 25P 25P Over 50i No sound 1080 50i 1394 E 50i 1080i 4ch 1080i on 625i 4ch 625i 1080i 625i Channels 5 SDI optional 50i through 8 60P 60P CAM 30P 30P Over 60P 4ch 720 24P 24P Over 60P Mo sound 59 94P 720P 4ch 720P on 525i 4ch 525i 1080i 525i i 1394 E 60P Channels 5 SDI n 60P through 8 optional CAM 50P 50P 4ch 25P 25P Over 50P No sound 720 50P 1394 50P 720P 4ch 720P on 625i 4ch 625i 1080i 625i SDI Channels 5 optional E 50P through 8 60i 60i 30P 30P Over 60i 4 channels 4 channels 1080i 24P Over 60i for for Playback CAM 24P Selectable 2 3 Pull down DVCPRO50 DVCPRO50 not from among and 2 or 4 and 2 or 4 output 24PA Over 60 4905 24PA DVCPRO5O aa n an 5251 channels 4 4 525i chames 525i 525i 59 94i 2 3 3 2 Pull down DVCPRO selectable selectable 1394 and DV 60i for for VIDEO 60i DVCPRO DVCPRO _ and DV and DV ae SA 60i optional CAM 50i 50i 4 channels 4 channels 10801 25P 25P Over 50i for for Playback Selectable z DVCPRO50 DVCPRO50 1394 50i not from among and 2 or 4 and 2 or 4 output 576 501 VIDEO __ DVCPROSO 50i 625i channels 4 625i channels 625i p 625i DVCPRO selectable selectable SDI and DV 50i for for _ optional DVCPRO DVCPRO and DV and DV 1 The time code user bits and UMID are recorded 2 3 or user bits are not output 4 30P Over 60i This operates in the inte
44. 75 Q HD SD SDI input board AJ YA350G is attached HD Compliant with the SMPTE292M 296M 299M standards SD Compliant with the SMPTE259M C 272M A ITU R BT656 4 standards Front Audio Level control knob Control knob mounting screw x 1 Weight and dimentions when shown are approximately Specifications are subject to change without notice AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 MIC IN WIRELESS IN XLR x 2 3 pins LINE MIC and 48 V switch selectable LINE 4 dBu 3 dBu O dBu 4 dBu selectable with menu MIC 60 dBu 60 dBu 50 dBu selectable with menu MIC 48V Compatible with 48V phantom power supply 60 dBu 60 dBu 50 dBu selectable with menu XLR x 1 5 pins 48 V phantom ON OFF selectable with menu 40 dBu 50 dBu 40 dBu selectable with menu 25 pin D SUB 40 dBu AUDIO OUT CH1 CH2 Headphones DC IN DC OUT LENS EVF REMOTE GPS USB XLR x 1 5 pins 4 dBu 3 dBu 0 dBu 4 dBu selectable with menu Balanced low impedance output Stereo mini jack x 2 XLR x 1 4 pins DC 12 V DC 11 V 17 V 4 pins DC 12 V DC 11 V 17 V Maximum rated current 1 5 A 12 pins 20 pins 10 pins connector for AJ RC10G 6 pins connector for AJ GPS900G HOST 4 pin Type A connector compliant with USB version 2 0 DEVICE 4 pin Type B connector compliant with USB version 2 0 Specifications Specifications 177 Information on Disposal for Users of Waste Electrical amp Ele
45. A OK 3 2K 8 For the 3200K CC ND filter if the subject s color temperature is lower than 2300K or higher than 9900K the following message appears If the arrow points down the actual color temperature is lower than the temperature indicated If the arrow points up 7 the actual temperature is higher than the temperature indicated AWB A OK 2 3K 38 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance Detection area for the white balance The detection area for the white balance is selectable between 90 50 and 25 using the menu option AWB AREA This option can be found in the lt WHITE BALANCE MODE gt screen which is accessible from the CAM OPERATION page The detection area is factory set to 25 50 Leeann a 25 ie 90 When you have no time to adjust the white balance Position the WHITE BAL switch at PRST This adjusts the white balance for the filter according to the position of the CC ND FILTER control When the white balance has not been automatically adjusted When the white balance has not been successfully adjusted the viewfinder displays an error message If one of the error messages listed below appears take the appropriate steps then adjust the white balance again lf the error message appears after For more information contact your distributor repeated readjustments the interior of th
46. AUDIO SAMPLING RATE sampling frequency of recorded sound and BITS PER SAMPLE digitized bit s of recorded sound ACCESS Displays CREATOR person who recorded the clip CREATION DATE date when the clip was recorded LAST UPDATE DATE date of the latest update of the clip and LAST UPDATE PERSON person who made the latest update of the clip Displays MANUFACTURER name of the device manufacturer SERIAL NO serial number of the device and MODEL NAME model name of the device Displays SHOOTER name of the person who shot the video START DATE start date of shooting END DATE end date of shooting and LOCATION ALTITUDE LONGITUDE LATITUDE SOURCE PLACE NAME altitude longitude latitude and source of the information and name of the location SCENARIO Displays PROGRAM NAME SCENE NO and TAKE NO Displays REPORTER name of the reporter PURPOSE purpose of shooting and OBJECT object of shooting MEMO Displays NO the number of the text memo OFFSET location of the frame where the text memo is added PERSON person who recorded the text memo added to the clip and TEXT contents of the text memo 1 The USER CLIP NAME recording method is selectable For details refer to Selecting the USER CLIP NAME recording method page 110 2 Be sure to enter PROGRAM NAME when entering SCENARIO It is not possible to record only the SCENE N
47. BAL switch to A or B 2 B When the white or black balance is not saved and you have no time to adjust the white balance Position the WHITE BAL switch to PRST This adjusts the white balance against the filter according to the position of the FILTER control 2 C If the white balance is adjusted on the spot Position the WHITE BAL switch to A or B and shoot a white test subject so that it appears at the center of the screen Then follow the steps below to adjust the white balance 1 Press the AUTO W B BAL switch toward AWB to adjust the white balance 2 Press the AUTO W B BAL switch toward ABB to adjust the black balance 3 Press the AUTO W B BAL switch toward AWB to adjust the white balance again For directions on making adjustments see Adjusting the White Balance page 38 and Adjusting the Black Balance page 41 3 Point the camera at your subject to adjust the focus and zoom REC START STOP button REC button on the handle or VTR button at the lens starts recording of video and sound on the P2 card A cluster of data that consists of video and sound generated through a shooting action together with such added information as meta data is called a clip Notes In 24P or 24PA mode recording starts at the beginning of the 5 frame cycle Therefore the time code may not be continuous if recording immediately follows clips that were not recorded using 24P or 24PA mode Even if a P2 c
48. BATTERY SELECT DIONIC90 EXT DC IN SELECT AC ADPT BATT NEAR END ALARM OFF BATT NEAR END CANCEL ON BATT END ALARM ON BATT REMAIN FULL 170 CARD NEAR END ALARM ON CARD NEAR END TIME 2min CARD END ALARM ON CARD REMAIN 3min Notes Other batteries may be used by changing the menu setting but system compatibility is not guaranteed Charge the battery pack with the battery charger before using it Please refer to the battery charger s instruction manual for information about charging 88 Preparation Power Supply B Mounting the Battery and Setting the Battery Type Using an Anton Bauer Battery Pack 3 Setting the battery type Select the battery type listed under BATTERY 1 Mount the Anton Bauer battery pack SELECT Select BATTERY SELECT from the Power supply output connector for lighting OPERATION page more information e PROPAC14 e TRIMPAC14 e HYTRON50 e HYTRON100 Anton Bauer e HYTRON140 Battery Pack e DIONIC90 Lighting e DIONIC160 control switch lt For your information gt The Anton Bauer battery holder includes both a power supply output connector for lighting and a lighting control switch which are convenient when attaching a light Please contact Anton Bauer for information about the lighting system 2 Insert the battery and slide it in the direction of the arrow lt For your information gt Removing the battery pack Completely p
49. CONTROL items to BOTH Select the 1394 CONTROL item on the lt 1394 SETTING gt screen in the SYSTEM SETTING page RED The red tally lamp lights up GREEN The green tally lamp lights up CHAR The VF displays REC in characters OFF SLOT SIDE LCD SIDE BOTH ACCESS LED u F Specify whether or not to enable the P2 card access LEDs OFF Disables both LEDs above the slots and on the side panel SLOT SIDE Enables the LED above the slots and disables the LED on the side panel LCD SIDE Enables the LED on the side panel and disables the LED above the slots BOTH Enables both LEDs above the slots and on the side panel HOLD CLEAR P OFF GPS DATA Select whether or not to hold the UMID GPS position information while the power is turned off thereby keeping this information as status data holding the previous value until the power is turned on again which enables a new measurement to start HOLD Hold and save the data CLEAR Clear the data when the power is turned off and save zero No Info from the next power on until a new measurement is completed ON OFF Used to specify whether or not to output metadata UMID to SDI when the VIDEO OUT menu option is set to HD SDI or SD HDI OFF u F Select whether or not to add an error detection flag to the SD SDI output ON OFF SAVE SW AUD OUT u F
50. Clip information is being updated Playback operation disabled AJ HPX2000 is in USB DEVICE mode When communication is disabled the indication blinks Indicates that the camera recorder is set to the USB HOST mode When the external hard disk is not successfully recognized then the indication blinks Thumbnail is being manipulated Displayed when the connection of the DVCPRO DV connector is abnormal when AJ YAD800G is attached Displayed when proxy recording on either the P2 card or the SD memory card starts when AJ YAX800G is attached the PROXY REC item on the VF INDICATOR2 screen is turned on Displayed when proxy recording on the P2 card starts when AJ YAX800G is attached the PROXY REC item on the VF INDICATOR2 screen is turned on When the remaining free space on the SD Memory card drops below one minute during proxy recording the message is displayed when AJ YAX800G is attached Displayed when full capacity is reached during proxy recording on the SD memory card when AJ YAX800G is attached Displayed when proxy recording stops because of failure on either the video encoder card or the stream when AJ YAX800G is attached Displayed when a failure occurs on the SD memory card during proxy recording and only recording on the SD memory card stops when AJ YAX800G is attached No return video playback or externally input video can be output to the viewfinder TC REGEN The RET button was pressed to
51. GAIN 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 or 300B OdB S c U F R 300B H DTL LEVEL 00 For performing the horizontal detail io correction level setting s clu F R 63 V DTL LEVEL 00 For performing the vertical detail 30 correction level setting s clu F R 31 DTLCORING 00 For performing the noise elimination on level setting for detail s cju F R 15 H DTL FREQ 00 For performing the horizontal detail ig frequency selection C U F R 31 LEVEL 0 For setting the LEVEL DEPEND DEPEND i When the Y detail is emphasized details of dark sections are compressed 5 If the numerical value is larger details of siclulF R bright sections are also compressed MASTER 0 30 For setting the master gamma 0 01 GAMMA step 0 45 s clu F R 0 75 BLACK 3 For setting the gamma curve for the dark GAMMA portion OFF 3 to 1 43 The dark portion is compressed OFF Standard state 1 to 3 siclulFIR The dark portion is extended mMATRIX OFF For selecting the color correction table TABLE A for the linear matrix s c u F R B mCOLOR ON For switching ON OFF of the 12 axis CORRECT OFF independent color correction S C U F R Notes The items indicated by are the setting items for PAINT MENU SW m R W in the lt SD CARD R W SELECT gt screen The items without are the setting items for PAINT MENU LEVEL R W Please refer to SD CARD R W SELECT page 169 for more information f images are shot when the master gain is set to 3qB
52. It can be changed to any color temperature menu is displayed using a menu option For more information see Setting Color Temperature Manually 13 Text memo button page 40 Pressing the 4 AUTO W B BAL Switch toward AWB automatically adjusts the white balance saving the adjusted value in Memory A or B For more information see Adjusting the White Balance page 38 Records a text memo if pressed during recording or A or B playback or when playback is paused Through a menu option the auto tracking white balance ATW can be assigned to B For more information see Adjusting the White Balance page 38 17 Parts and their Functions Shooting and Recording Playback Functions Section 14 15 16 17 SAVE ON OFF switch Used to select the power supply method for each output section ON The output selected through the menu option SAVE SW is power saved This option can be found on the OPTION MODE screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page OFF Power saving is canceled Note The ON OFF switch does not function during record ing The ON OFF status changes after recording is completed VIDEO OUT output signal selector switch Changes the mode of the signals output through the VIDEO OUT connector HDSDI HD SDI signals are output When the camera recorder is in SD mode SD SDI signals are output SD SDI SD SDI signals are output Signals are down converted in HD mode VBS Comp
53. LANGUAGE from the thumbnail menu Then select a language and press the SET button The selectable languages are ENGLISH JAPANESE CHINESE Notes Japanese or Chinese characters indicated in English or other characters that cannot be indicated in English will not display properly they will be indicated as The letters which can be input with AJ HPX2000 are only the alphanumeric AJ HPX2000 cannot input Japanese and Chinese Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Setting of Clip Meta Data 111 Setting of Proxy optional By attaching the video encoder card AJ YAX800G optional either to the optional slot or Slot 5 it is possible to specify the proxy recording setting Select OPERATION gt DEVICE SETUP gt PROXY from DELETE the thumbnail menu to specify the setting PROPERTY FORMAT For more information on settings see the video encoder META DATA card instruction manual ALL Tr Da thie EXIT 00 06 47 11 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor 2 Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select OPERATION FORMAT from thethumbnail menu The following screen appears Select the slot number for the P2 card you want to format Select EXIT if formatting is not required THUMBNAIL gt DELETE OPERATION gt FORMAT PROPERTY META DATA EXIT 3 The following screen appears Use the cursor buttons and
54. Position of VIDEO OUT CHARACTER switch FUNCTION OUTPUT MEM CAM OFF Position of OUTPUT SEL switch MON OUT SELECT VBS VF Y Signal mode set through the MONITOR OUT menu option CHAR ON OFF The setting for menu option MONITOR OUT CHAR The options MONITOR OUT and MONITOR OUT CHAR can be found in the OUTPUT SEL screen which is accessible from the SYSTEM SETTING page FUNCTION TOTAL Total remaining free space capacities of the P2 cards loaded in P2 Card P2CARD STATUS Slots 1 5 SLOT1 SLOT2 SLOT3 Remaining free space capacity of each card The numbers denote the P2 SLOT4 SLOT5 card slot numbers The card status is indicated as ACTIVE ACCESSING INFO READING FULL PROTECTED NOT SUPPORTED FORMAT ERROR NO CARD PROXY For details of statuses see P2 CARD ACCESS LED and status of P2 cards page 29 OP SLOT Indicates optional slot status The card status is indicated as PROXY NO CARD NOT SUPPORTED AUDIO Enabling or CH1 ON OFF If the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control is in effect for Channel 1 then ON is disabling the FRONT indicated If not OFF is indicated AUDIO LEVEL CH2 ON OFF If the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control is in effect for Channel 2 then ON is control indicated If not OFF is indicated AUDIO Phantom power status for the microphone FRONT ON OFF REAR ON OFF Phantom power status of the front microphone Phantom power status of the rear microphone For more information see MIC AUDIO2 page 167 AUDIO Input s
55. R W Please refer to SD CARD R W SELECT page 169 for more information Menu The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode Menu Menu Description Tables 151 KNEE LEVEL GAMMA Items Adjustable Remark Items Adjustable Remark Data Saved Range Data Saved Range MASTER PED 200 Set the master pedestal MASTER 0 30 Set the master gamma in 0 01 steps AMMA 015 i 0 45 S c U F R 200 s cl u F R 0 75 MMANUAL JON Set the mode when the AUTO KNEE RGAMMA 15 Set the Rch gamma KNEE OFF switch is OFF The KNEE POINT SLOPE set value is enabled when this aoe s c u F R setting is ON s cju F R 15 KNEE POINT 70 0 For setting the knee point position in B GAMMA 15 Set the Bch gamma increments of 1 steps 93 0 00 S C U F R 107 0 s c u F R 15 KNEE SLOPE 00 For setting the inclination of the knee GAMMA DFLT For selecting the gamma mode MODE SEL JHD DFLT This will operate as SD gamma in 85 SD SD mode or HD gamma in HD s c u F R 99 FILM LIKE1 mode BWHITE CLIPJON Set the WHITE CLIP feature to ON or FOKE ip 4 Paasen trin OFF OFF The WHITE CLIP LVL set value is re JATA o rae eTSNCS Nr nets High Definition SIC U FIR enabled when this setting is ON SD
56. Recording Handling data Adjustments and Settings for Recording 83 E save the lens file into the built in memory Select the file No 1 Using the menu operations open the lt LENS FILE gt screen from the FILE page 2 Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to the FILE SELECT item 3 Press the JOG dial button and the file number will flash Turn the JOG dial button to select the file 1 to 8 to be recorded lt LENS FILE gt gt FILE NO Ba Be READ LEE E ba WRITE RESET ALL TITLE Roms oND K 4 Press the JOG dial button to enter the file number Give a title to the selected file 5 Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to the TITLE item lt LENS FILE gt FILE NO oa READ WRITE RESET ALL gt TITLE Roms oND 6 When the JOG dial button is pressed the arrow cursor moves to the title input area and the input mode is established lt LENS FILE gt FILE NO 1 READ WRITE RESET ALL TITLE Roms oND 84 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data 7 Press the JOG dial button again and turn it until the character to be set is displayed When the button is turned the character displayed is switched in the following sequence Space o Y Alphabetical characters A to Z Y Numerals Y Symbols O0to9 gt lt X Press the JOG dial button to enter
57. UNREG Power supply to the wireless receiver 6 RX ON Power supply remote output to the wireless receiver 7 RF WARN RF warning input from the wireless receiver 8 RM5 Not used 9 RM4 Not used 10 SPARE 1 Not used 11 SPARE 2 Not used 12 EXT CLK Not used 13 CLK SHIELD Not used 14 CH 2 SHIELD Not used 15 CH 2 HOT Not used 16 CH 2 COLD Not used 17 5 6V Power supply to the wireless receiver 18 VIDEO OUT Not used 19 VIDEO RET Not used 20 VIDEO EN Not used 21 RM 1 RM CLK Not used 22 RM 2 RM DATA Not used 23 RM 3 RM WR Not used 24 RM 5V Not used 25 RM GND Not used 132 Maintenance and Inspections Maintenance Maker part number HDBB 25S 05 Hirose Denki 50000000000004 a 4 Warning System f warning Description Tables If a problem is detected immediately after the power is turned on or during operation this will be indicated by the WARNING lamp lamps inside the viewfinder and a warning tone Note The WARNING lamp has the highest priority followed by the tally lamp and then the warning tone When multiple errors occur simultaneously a higher priority indication will be triggered The WIRELESS RF however may not be indicated depending on the menu setting 1 System Errors 3 Battery Empty Display window indication The error code lights up Display window indication All 7 bar indicators for battery remaining capacity start blinking WARNING l
58. V steps 17 0 NEAR END 11 0 Set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 V steps 13 0 5 0 END 11 0 Set the END voltage in 0 1 V steps 12 4 C U F 15 0 When the digital battery is attached in the unit the remaining capacity of the battery is displayed in percent The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode Menu Menu Description Tables 165 MIC AUDIO1 166 Menu Menu Description Tables Items Adjustable Banaikes Items Adjustable Reiharks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range FRONTVR OFF Select whether or not to enable the MIC LOWCUT OFF Select the microphone low cut filter for CH1 FRONT FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control for the CH4 FRONT Input Channel 4 W L signal selected as the input signal to W L OFF The microphone low cut filter is REAR AUDIO CH1 REAR disabled for any input ALL OFF Disabled for any input selected FRONT The microphone low cut filter is Recording level does not change enabled when the front by turning the volume control microphone is selected FRONT Only enabled when FRONT is W L The microphone low cut filter is selected enabled only when the wireless W L Only enabled when WIRELESS
59. VF TYPE on the lt SYSTEM MODE gt screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page depending on your viewfinder The factory setting is set to the HD viewfinder AJ HPX2000 integrates a camera unit equipped with three CCDs incorporating a 2 3 inch on chip lens featuring progressive drive technology All pixel reading and a video recorder player VTR that supports DVCPRO HD DVCPROS50 DVCPRO and DV formats AJ HPX2000 offers choices of 1080i 720p mode for HD and NTSC PAL mode for SD It also provides features such as storage type gain enhancement for news reports and film like gammas for production purposes providing many applications ranging from news reports to production Utilising P2 cards which require no mechanism as media your unit offers greater responsibility operability and portability It is highly resistant to shock and vibration during recording and therefore ensures stable operation for capturing quality video images under the most adverse conditions General Features of Camera unit H Multi format W Digital Zoom The unit supports the following video systems by driving The camera unit features progressive digital zoom This the CCD progressively Refer to page 36 is particularly effective when you want to zoom in closer on the subject Mode Video system Recording format 1080 59 94i entsaeut H Auto White Balance with Automatic Tracking 1080 29 97P capability
60. W L OFF The microphone low cut filter is eke REAR disabled for any input The ___ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the FRONT The microphone low cut filter is preset mode enabled when the front microphone is selected W L The microphone low cut filter is enabled only when the wireless microphone is selected REAR The microphone low cut filter is enabled only when the rear clu F microphone is selected MIC AUDIO2 TC UB Items Adjustable Remarks Items Adjustable Remarka Data Saved Range Data Saved Range FRONT MIC JON Select the phantom power supply for the TC MODE DF Set the time code mode POWER OFF front microphone NDF DF Drop frame C U F P drop frame REARMIC JON Select the phantom power supply for the When the camera recorder operates at POWER OFF rear microphone 50 Hz or in 24P or 24PA mode the non When OFF is selected no phantom drop frame is always used power is supplied even if the REAR C U F clu F AUDIO CH1 or CH2 switch is set to 48 UB MODE USER Select the user bits mode MONITOR STEREO When the MONITOR switch is set to ST lass USER oe value setinithe LOD n Fl Ma SES the signal format forthe EXT TIME Select local time hours TCG minutes seconds FRONT MIC 40dB Select the front microphone input
61. according to the light conditions Note For examples of CC ND FILTER adjustments see Shooting and Recording Playback Functions Section page 16 3 Place a white pattern at a point where the light conditions match those for the light source of the subject Then zoom in on the white pattern so that white color appears in the screen A white object cloth or wall may be used instead of a white pattern The illustration below shows the required size for the white space Notes Do not include a high intensity spot in the screen The white object must appear at the center of the screen 1 4 or more of the screen in width a 1 4 or more of the screen in height 4 Adjust the lens iris 5 Flip up the AUTO W B BAL switch so that it is positioned at AWB then release it The switch returns to the central position with the white balance automatically adjusted Note To cancel automatic white balance adjustment in process the viewfinder displays AWB ACTIVE re position the AUTO W B BAL switch at AWB If automatic adjustment is cancelled the value in effect before automatic adjustment will be used 6 During an adjustment the viewfinder displays the following message AWB ACTIVE 7 The adjustment will take effect in a few seconds and the following message will appear The adjusted value is automatically stored in the memory specified in Step J A or B AWB
62. be configured in the same manner the method of displaying the menu screen depends on the particular menu Note When the unit is in thumbnail mode the viewfinder displays THUMBNAIL OPEN disabling navigation through the menu 1 Press the MENU button for three seconds or longer The MAIN MENU screen appears together with its options rete MAIN MENU SYSTEM SETTING PAINT VF CAM OPERATION MAIN OPERATION FILE MAINTENANCE USER MENU SELECT L 2 Turn the JOG dial button to move the mark to a desired menu option Then press the JOG dial button to display the sub menu screen r MAIN MENU SYSTEM SETTING PAINT VF CAM OPERATION MAIN OPERATION FILE MAINTENANCE USER MENU SELECT X 3 Turn the JOG dial button to move the mark to a desired menu option Then press the JOG dial button to display the options screen lt CAM OPERATION gt CAMERA ID SHUTTER SPEED SHUTTER SELECT USER SW SW MODE WHITE BALANCE MODE USER SW GAIN IRIS 5 Turn the JOG dial button to change the value 4 Turn the JOG dial button to move the mark to a desired option Then press the JOG dial button The value starts blinking lt USER SW gt Seveeyywwewwe gt USER MAIN SW S GAIN gt USER1 SW TYBI 200M USER2 SW DS GAIN To increase the value Turn the JOG dial button clockwise as seen from the front of the c
63. code generator is externally locked the time code instantly becomes locked with the external time code and the counter displays the external time code value Do not put the unit in recording mode before the sync generator stabilises Be sure to enter the non drop frame time code to externally lock the time code in the 24P or 24PA mode Externally locking the drop frame time code is not permitted Video quality may be degraded momentarily while externally locking to adjust the 5 frame cycle This is not abnormal When 1394 is selected for the menu option REC SIGNAL it is not possible to synchronize with the time code entered via TC IN connector The menu option REC SIGNAL is found in the SYSTEM MODE screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page Setting the user bits when the time code is externally locked When the TCG switch is positioned to F RUN only the time code is locked to an external time code To lock the user bits to an externally input value the UB MODE and VITC UB MODE menu options must be set to EXT and USER EXIT respectively The menu option UB MODE and VITC UB MODE can be found in the lt TC UB gt screen which is accessible from the MAIN OPERATION page To unlock the externally locked time code Discontinue external time code supply then position the TCG switch at R RUN Cautions in switching the power source from battery to external power supply Connect the DC IN socket with the external power supply befo
64. controls the action of the 1 back and 8 rear tally lamps ON Back and rear tally lamps enabled OFF Back and rear tally lamps disabled 3 WARNING lamp This lamp starts blinking or lights up if something unusual occurs in the memory 4 USB lamp Stays on when the camera recorder is in USB mode 5 Access lamp Blinks when the camera recorder is in recording or playback mode or when a P2 card is being accessed or stays on when a recordable P2 card is inserted 6 LIGHT button Use this button to control illumination of the display window Alternately pressing this button toggles illumination of the 7 display window on or off Parts and their Functions Warning and Status Display Functions 23 Display Window Functions P2 card battery remaining level indications Media remaining space indication bar The bar indicates the remaining free space on each P2 card using a seven segment display Each segment can represent either three or five minutes of remaining free space depending on the value set through the menu option CARD REMAIN According to the set value the segments disappear one by one The menu option CARD REMAIN can be found in the lt BATTERY P2CARD gt screen on the MAIN OPERATION page of NDF SLAVE HOLD W HDVGPSY ve CTL VTCG TIME DATE P REC J Ce I AA A A A ee h Y minM s D frm p MEDIA E mu mu mu mu m m mm F B BATT E mu m mm mm mm mm m F LOOP OP SLOT 1
65. copy or restore the clip Add or delete a shot mark and a text memo on the clip thumbnail Format P2 cards and SD memory cards Upload the clip meta data from an SD memory card Thumbnail Manipulations Overview Thumbnail screens are configured as follows ALL a ie a tT 00 00 00 00 00 00 55 11 00 01 28 07 00 02 08 07 can 03 i iT TA 00 02 33 26 00 03 51 04 00 04 48 26 00 06 47 11 k Do ty E iy iT 00 00 45 12 00 09 44 03 _00 00 00 00 THUMBNAIL OPERATION a2 j ALL 2 al es See ALL CLIP DELETE OPERATION SAME FORMAT CLIPS ACE SETS a KL PROPERTY FORMAT kg 8 07 00 02 08 07 at Pi Fi SELECTED CLIPS 08 REPAIR CLIP o8 META DATA MARKED CLIPS i RE CONNECTION TEXT MEMO CLIPS ITI hi or copy g A 5 c 48 26 _00 06 47 11 ae SETUP gt su i mm 00 00 00 0 00 00 45 12 00 09 44 03 _00 00 00 00 I PROPERTY CARD STATUS Devices META DATA PROPERTY SETUP iT EXIT L 00 06 47 11 ALL CLIP DELETE SAME FORMAT CLIPS FORMAT PROPERTY SELECTED CLIPS REPAIR CLIP 0011 MARKED CLIPS RE CONNECTION Ia o a sen cue nue TEXT MEMO CLIPS COPY ee ere oo TERT MENO al DEVICE SETUP START Tc on000000 pence 3 F g i EXIT DATE 2006 AUG 0S SHOOT bia J RSE ey Ra age noe ee Ls 00 AN 00 aol te M PORMAT eon HENO eo j A CARD STATUS O P2 REMAIN SLOT CLIPS 0 SETUP ALL HIDE gt EXIT MARKER IND TEXT
66. free space on the P2 card as the P2 card status display Factory setting USED Show used memory capacity on the P2 card as the P2 card status display Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Properties 115 E Contents of P2 Card Status Display Settings 1 2 0 NO CARD NO CARD 95 33 Write protect Mark The A mark appears if the P2 card is write protected P2 Card Status remaining free space The remaining memory capacity of the P2 card is indicated by a bar graph and percentage The bar graph indicator moves to the left as the remaining free space decreases The following indications may appear depending on the card status FORMAT ERROR An unformatted P2 card is inserted NOT SUPPORTED An unsupported card is inserted in the camera NO CARD P2 cards are not inserted To check unique information such as serial number or user ID move the cursor to the desired P2 card and press the SET button P2 Card Remaining Capacity Total Capacity Displays the P2 card remaining capacity and total capacity in minutes The total of the remaining memory capacity for each P2 card that is displayed may not match the actual total remaining memory capacity for the P2 cards because only the figure in minute is displayed Total remaining free space for the slot Displays the total remaining free space for all 5 slots Please note that the remaining capacity of a write protected P2 card is not included in the total
67. in the VIDEO AUX area input through the DVCPRO DV connector is recorded As per the UB mode Regardless of the setting UB in the VIDEO AUX area input through the DVCPRO DV connector is recorded 1 It will not be slaved to a TC or UB value that is input in the SDI IN connector 2 3 4 5 6 7 connector E Setting of the user bits Can be slaved to values input through the DVCPRO DV connector but not to the TC for TC IN connector If the option menu FRAME RATE UB is set to MENU then recording is performed as per the UB or VITC UB mode If this is the case however edit tools e g PC edit software cannot record the required information For free run the time code is slaved to the time code input through the TC IN connector For free run the time code is slaved to the time code input through the TC IN connector if it is a non drop frame When the option UB MODE is set to EXT then the bits are slaved to the user bits input through the TC IN connector If the option UB MODE is set to EXT then the bits are slaved to the user bits input through the DVCPRO DV The user bits UB to be recorded in the sub code area are selected through the menu option UB MODE The user bits VITC UB to be recorded in the VIDEO AUX area are selected through the menu option VITC UB MODE USER UB MODE only The included user value is recorded A user value is input through the display window For more inform
68. is adjusted S C U F R displayed ON To retain the values set in the R GAIN AWB B 200 For setting the Rch gain when the respective items of RPEDESTAL WHITE BAL switch is in the B position G PEDESTAL and B PEDESTAL 000 lf the remote control unit is OFF The pedestal levels of the Rch 4200 connected settings made from the the Gch and the Bch are set to menu are disabled The set value is siclulFIR 0 S C U F R displayed RFLARE 100 For adjusting the flare level of the Rch B GAIN AWB B 200 For setting the Bch gain when the Adjustment values in this item are WHITE BAL switch is in the B position 000 added to the flare adjustment value that 000 e lf the remote control unit is 100 is adjusted on lt LENS FILE ADJ gt 200 connected settings made from the screen menu are disabled The set value is if the remote control unit is slclulF R displayed connected settings made from the AWB AGAIN JON For setting the values of the Rch gain Ha i disabled The set value ig OFFSET OFF and the Bch gain when the auto white S C U F R isplayed balance is executed as the WHITE BAL G FLARE 100 For adjusting the flare level of the Gch switch is in the A position Adjustment values in this item are ON To retain the values set in the 000 added to the flare adjustment value that items of R GAIN AWB A and B 100 is adjusted on lt LENS FILE ADJ gt GAIN AWB A screen OFF The values of the Rch gain and lf the remote control unit is
69. is not permitted When the TCG switch is positioned at SET thumbnails cannot be manipulated Regeneration of Time Code When the TGC switch is positioned to R RUN the time code recorded on the last frame of the last recorded clip with the latest recording date on the P2 card is read and this time code can be used again When the menu option FIRST REC TC is set to REGEN and a P2 card is removed or inserted or the target recording card is changed with the USER button for the SLOT SEL function the same time code is added to the last recorded clip on the target P2 card When there is no recorded clip the time code is recorded on the new recording target P2 card from the value generated by the TC generator built into the camera recorder The menu option FIRST TC REC can be found in the lt TC UB gt screen which is accessible from the MAIN OPERATION page Regeneration function using REC REVIEW If the menu option FIRST REC TC is set to PRESET if the time code has been set or reset or if the time code has been switched from free run to Rec run it is possible to regenerate the time code as the last time code of a clip recorded on the P2 card This action requires you to preset the RET SW menu option on the SW MODE screen to R REVIEW and the REC REVIEW REGEN menu option on the TC UB screen to ON 1 Make sure the P2 card to record the data To regenerate the time code of the last recorded clip when more than one P2 card is i
70. is pressed during playback or the playback has finished at the end of the clip then the thumbnail screen appears again with the pointer replaced with the time code where the playback started Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button to select EXIT or press the EXIT button to return the pointer to the upper part of the thumbnail screen 1 Select the desired text memo by carrying out steps 1 3 for Playing back a clip at the position where a text memo is recorded page 106 2 Move the pointer to the desired text memo and then press the SET button 3 Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button to select OPERATION DELETE from the thumbnail menu YES and NO appear to confirm deletion Use the cursor buttons and the SET button to select YES The text memo is deleted 106 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Text Memo E Using a text memo to break a clip and copy the necessary portion 1 Select a desired text memo in a clip by carrying out steps 1 3 for Playing back a clip at the position where a text memo is recorded page 106 2 Move the pointer to the desired text memo and then press the SET button You can select more than one text memo 3 Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button to select OPERATION COPY 4 User the cursor buttons and SET buttons to select the destination slot Then select YES to start copying the clip The portion between the selected text memo and the next one is copied If no text memo is found after the selected on
71. level FRM RATE DATE Select local date and time 2 last LEVEL 50dB REGEN digits of year month date time Ici U F EXT When CAM VIDEO or REARMIC 50dB Select the rear microphone input level SDI is selected in REC CH1 LVL 60dB SIGNAL on the SYSTEM MODE screen the user bits input to the C uU F TC IN connector are recorded REAR MIC 50dB Select the rear microphone input level When 1394 is selected the CH2 LVL z 60dB user bits of signals input to the C U F DVCPRO DV connector are REAR LINE IN 0dB Select the rear line input level recorded LVL 4qB If reading fails USER value is lelulF 3eB retained TCG TCG value enters UB AUDIO OUT 0dB Select the audio output level FRM RATE LVL 4dB Select the shooting information e g 3dB frame rate for the camera For more IC UI F information see Frame rate HEADROOM 18qB Set the headroom standard level eee recorded in user bits C U F 2008 REGEN Read out value stored in the WIRELESS JON Select whether or not to enable the card and record value WARN OFF alarm to trigger for poor wireless continuously c uUl F receiver reception Note When the camera recorder is in 720P Se C U F mode FRM RATE is always selected ine in te Adjustable Range goumin Mdede We VITC UB USER EXT Select the user bits mode for VAUX TC preset mode MODE TIME VITC DATE USER EXT TCG If UB MODE is set to EXT the EXT FRM RATE value is recorded I
72. lithium battery built into the camera recorder When the lithium battery is exhausted the viewfinder indicates the message BACKUP BATT EMPTY when the power is turned on For more information see Maintenance page 128 E Setting the Time Code 1 Position the DISPLAY switch at TC 2 Position the TCG switch at SET 3 Set the menu option TC MODE to DF or NDF DF steps the time code in drop frame mode and NDF steps it in non drop frame mode However the camera always operates in NDF for 24P and 24PA modes The menu option TC MODE can be found in the lt TC UB gt screen which is accessible from the MAIN OPERATION page Note Switching between DF and NDF is operative only when the system frequency of the camera recorder is set to 59 94 Hz 4 Use the CURSOR buttons to set the time code The time code setting range extends from 00 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 29 59 94 Hz or to 23 59 59 24 50 Hz gt button Shifts the target blinking digit to the right lt button Shifts the target blinking digit to the left A button Advances the blinking number by one digit V button Winds back the blinking number by one digit Change the position of the TCG switch F RUN steps the time code in free run mode and R RUN set it in recording run mode Notes During operation in 24P or 24PA modes the time code setting is adjusted in 5 frame units Setting the time code during recording
73. microphone is selected is selected REAR The microphone low cut filter is REAR Only enabled when REAR is enabled only when the rear selected IclulF microphone is selected clu F ALL Enabled for any inputselected LIMITER CHT TON Select the limiter FRONTVR OFF Select whether or not to enable the OFF The limiter is enabled when AUDIO CH2 FRONT FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control for the clju F SELECT CH1 switch is set to MAN W L signal selected as an input signal to LIMITER CH2 ION Select the limiter REAR AUDIO CH2 OFF The limiter is enabled when AUDIO ALL OFF Disabled for any input selected SELECT CH2 switch is set to MAN Recording level does not change lelulFl by turning the volume control FRONT Only enabled when FRONT is AUTO LEVEL ON Select the level setting method selected CH3 OFF For more information see CH3 and W L Only enabled when WIRELESS CH4 Recording Levels page 47 is selected C U F REAR Only enabled when REAR is AUTO LEVEL ON Select the level setting method selected CH4 OFF For more information see CH3 and IelulFl ALL Enabled for any input selected CH4 Recording Levels page 47 MIC LOWCUT OFF Select the microphone low cut filter for C U F CH1 FRONT Input Channel 1 25M REC CH 2CH Select the audio channels to be W L OFF The microphone low cut filter is SEL 4CH recorded in the DVCPRO and DV REAR disabled for any input formats FRONT The microphone low cut filter is
74. regenerate the time code as the time code for the last clip recorded on a P2 card 14 Time code indication TCG 12 59 59 20 TCG time code generator value TCR 12 59 59 20 TCR time code reader value V UBG ABCDEFOO UBG VUBG User bits generator value V UBR 123456 78 UBR VUBR User bits reader value CTL 1 59 59 20 Displays CTL count 15 D ZOOM DZx2 x3 x4 Magnification of the digital zoom when the unit is in digital zoom mode 16 Extender EX Lens extender used 17 Color temperature K KK Color temperature assigned to A B and PRST of the WHITE BAL switch this is a value stored at AWB performance or a value set through the menu option The indication is not provided in ATW mode 18 Filter position 1 4 Position of the CC ND filter a This indicates that the filter has not been set to a proper position 19 Dynamic range DRS This appears when the video level of a part with high brightness is stretcher mode compressed and the function stretching the dynamic range is selected 66 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder Screen Status Displays Information Item Indication Status 20 WHITE BAL switch A WHITE BAL switch positioned at A position B WHITE BAL switch positioned at B P WHITE BAL switch positioned at PRST T ATW mode active When brightness and color are outside operating limits the indication blinks 21 Stored gain 6 1 10 1 12 1 15 1 20 1 Stora
75. selection under BATTERY SELECT SELECT gt Enable selection Enable selection e Disable selection e Disable selection AUTO Select auto or manual to set the NEAR AUTO Select auto or manual to set the NEAR MANUAL END voltage MANUAL END voltage AUTO Set voltage automatically AUTO Set voltage automatically MANUAL Set voltage manually MANUAL Set voltage manually 11 0 When MANUAL is selected in the menu 11 0 When MANUAL is selected in the menu above set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 above set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 135 V steps 132 V steps clu F 5 c u F 5 DIONIC90 Dk Enable selection under BATTERY ENDURA D Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT SELECT x Enable selection x Enable selection e Disable selection e Disable selection AUTO Select auto or manual to set the NEAR AUTO Select auto or manual to set the NEAR MANUAL END voltage MANUAL END voltage AUTO Set voltage automatically AUTO Set voltage automatically MANUAL Set voltage manually MANUAL Set voltage manually 11 0 When MANUAL is selected in the menu 11 0 When MANUAL is selected in the menu above set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 above set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 13 6 V steps 132 V steps c u F 150 c u F 150 The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the BATTERY SETTING2 Items Adjustable Items
76. shutter speed in any shutter mode is set using the SHUTTER switch 1 Press the SHUTTER switch positioned at ON In SYNCHRO SCAN mode shutter speed can be switched towards SEL easily using the synchro scan adjustment switches ee on the side panel gt Note that the range of selectable shutter speeds may be _ a pre defined whether or not to use the SYNCHRO SCAN 0 mode may be determined through the lt SHUTTER SESS SPEED gt and lt SHUTTER SELECT gt screens These Zw screens are accessible through the menu on the CAM i OPERATION page NAN gt aS e The selected shutter speed is retained even if the unit is N TA I X fa turned off RIO g i Q 9 lt SHUTTER SPEED gt X Se ON SHUTTER switch POSITION2 ON 3 ene an 2 Once more press the SHUTTER switch towards a a SEL Repeat this switchover until the desired mode k or speed appears in the viewfinder screen D If all modes and speeds are available the display 5 changes in the following order 2 L NORMAL mode lt SHUTTER SELECT gt i 2 lt x POSITION1 POSITION2 POSITION3 POSITION4 POSITIONS POSITION6 POSITION SEL 1 100 POSITION2 SEL 1 120 SYNCHRO POSITION3 SEL 1 250 SCAN mode POSITION4 SEL 1 500 POSITIONS SEL 1 1000 Roane Pad ates Viewfinder displays relating to the shutter See Viewfinder Screen Status Displays page 61 a
77. switching the detection area for DS GAIN release the digital super gain mode 50 executing the automatic adjustment of cumulative gain 90 white balance LIM H The mode is released by 25 An area near the screen center making a change in the L M H equivalent to 25 of the screen is switch position and the detected DS GAIN switch USER 50 An area near the screen center switch equivalent to 50 of the screen is DS GAIN The mode is released using detected f 90 An area equivalent to 90 of the only the DS GAIN switch C U FIR screen is detected C U F R USER switch AWBB MEM For selecting the function to be assigned D ZOOM x2 JON For specifying whether to enable or ATW to the B position of the WHITE BAL OFF disable 2x when a user button on the switch camera recorder is assigned the digital MEM The value set when the white IC U FIR zoom function balance is automatically adjusted _ is saved which is used each time D ZOOM x3 JON For specifying whether to enable or the WHITE BAL switch is set to B OFF disable 3x when a user button on the re ATW The auto tracking white balance camera recorder is assigned the digital ate function is assigned CIU FIR zoom function CJU FIR D ZOOM x4 ON For specifying whether to enable or ATW SPEED NORMAL Select the control speed for the auto OFF disable 4x when a user button on the SLOW tracking white balance camera recorder is assigned the digital c U F R FAST C U F
78. telephoto and wide angle Set the zoom to manual zoom mode and check the zoom operation Turn the manual zoom lever to check that the image changes to telephoto and wide angle Set the iris to automatic adjustment mode and aim the lens at objects with different degrees of brightness to check that the automatic iris adjustment operates normally Set the iris to manual adjustment mode and turn the iris ring to check the manual iris adjustment 126 Maintenance and Inspections Inspections Before Shooting 5 While holding down the instant iris automatic adjustment button aim the lens at objects with different degrees of brightness to check that the instant iris automatic adjustment operates properly Return the iris to automatic adjustment mode and change the GAIN switch setting to L M and H to check the following items The iris is adjusted for objects with the same brightness according to the switch setting The gain value displayed on the viewfinder screen changes according to the switch setting When a lens with an extender is mounted set the extender to the operating position to check that the extender operates properly ia Inspecting the Memory Recording Functions Make sure you successively carry out the inspections from 1 Inspecting the P2 Card Recording to 4 Inspecting the Earphone and Speaker 1 Inspecting the P2 Card Recording 1 Check on the display inside the viewfinder that the remaini
79. the Bch gain is set to O connected settings made from the slclulF R menu are disabled The set value is i displayed AWBBGAIN ON For setting the values of the Rch gain S CjU F R OFFSET OFF and the Bch gain when the auto white B FLARE 100 For adjusting the flare level of the Bch balance is executed as the WHITE BAL Adjustment values in this item are switch is in the B position 000 added to the flare adjustment value that ON To retain the values set in the 100 is adjusted on lt LENS FILE ADJ gt items of R GAIN AWB B and B screen GAIN AWB B if the remote control unit is OFF The values of the Rch gain and connected settings made from the siclulFIR the Bch gain is set to 0 menu are disabled The set value is slclulF R displayed The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the MATRIX COLOR CORRECTION Items Adjustable Remarks Items Adjustable Remarka Data Saved Range Data Saved Range m MATRIX A For selecting the color correction table R 63 For performing the color saturation TABLE B for the linear matrix SAT 00 correction of red S C U F R Eo MATRIX R G 63 For performing the linear matrix S C U F R 63 adjustment red green R Mg 63 For performing the color kati SAT 00 saturationcorrection between red and S C U F R 63 cs magenta M
80. the SET button to select YES THUMBNAIL DELETE OPERATION gt FORMS PROPERTY META DATA R 4 The selected P2 card is formatted 112 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Setting of Proxy optional Formatting SD memory cards SD memory cards can also be formatted from the thumbnail screen With an SD memory card inserted into the camera recorder perform the following operation 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor 2 Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select OPERATION FORMAT from the thumbnail menu The following screen appears Select SD CARD Select EXIT if formatting is not required ALL oa 2 THUMBNAIL OPERATION PROPERTY META DATA DELETE EXIT SD CARD EXIT 3 The following screen appears Use the cursor buttons and the SET button to select YES ALL PROPERTY META DATA EXIT SD CARD EXIT 00 00 45 12 00 09 44 03 Of 4 The SD memory card is formatted Note SD memory cards can also be formatted from the menu screen For more information see Handling SD memory cards page 75 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Formatting SD memory cards 113 Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode The thumbnail display mode can be customised to suit THUMBNAIL SIZE your preferences For the size of thumbnails displayed on one screen either LARGE 3 x 2 thumbnails dis
81. the character Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to the next position right and repeat steps 7 and 8 to set the characters maximum of 12 10 When the title has been input turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to the position lt LENS FILE gt FILE NO ot READ WRITE RESET ALL TITLE see ONAN 1 2 3 4 J 1 1 When the JOG dial button is pressed the arrow cursor returns to the TITLE item lt LENS FILE gt FILE NO al READ WRITE RESET ALL gt TITLE eee ONAN 1 De 3 4 J 12 Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to the WRITE position lt LENS FILE gt FILE NO oat READ gt WRITE RESET ALL TITLE eee ONAN 1 oe 3 4 13 When the JOG dial button is pressed the following message appears WRITE hase ze Paras 14 Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to YES and press the JOG dial button The current white shading correction value the flare compensation value and the RB gain offset correction value are stored in the built in memory of the unit Note The values will not be stored in the unit s internal memory if another menu screen is selected without executing WRITE or if the menu is exited 15 Press the MENU button The setting menu is cleared and the displays showing the unit s current statuses ap
82. the microphone holder 2 Q D ai 4 Set the AUDIO IN switch to FRONT depending on the audio channel to be recorded 2 Mount the microphone and tighten the clamping screw The microphone must be attached with the UP mark on the microphone facing up AUDIO IN Clamping Screw Switch when Using a Wireless Receiver When Using the Unislot Wireless Receiver 1 Remove the cover to insert the wireless receiver and secure it with the screws 2 Set the AUDIO IN switch to W L depending on the audio channel to be recorded Preparation Preparing for Audio Input 95 when Using Audio Devices 1 Connect the audio device to the AUDIO IN jack with the XLR cable 2 Set the AUDIO IN switch to REAR for the channel to which the XLR cable is connected 3 Set the LINE MIC 48V selector switch on the rear panel to LINE LINE MIC 48V Selector Switch When mounting the camera on a tripod use the tripod adapter supplied with the camera 1 Mount the tripod adapter on the tripod Tripod Adapter Note Select an appropriate hole in the adapter taking into account the center of gravity of the camera and tripod adapter combined Also make sure that the diameter of the selected hole matches the diameter of the pan head screw 2 Mount the camera on the tripod adapter Slide the camera forward along the grooves until
83. the number of P2 cards in use 6 REMAIN This section indicates the remaining free space on the hard disc drive in GB 7 PARTITION This section indicates the partition number one P2 card is used as a unit on the hard disc drive Note The screen indicates up to 10 partitions When the number of partitions exceeds 10 scroll down the indi cation with the cursor button V to view the hidden partitions 122 Connection with external device Connection with external devices using the USB 2 0 port 10 11 G N MODEL This section indicates the model of the P2 card that originally contained data on the partition DATE TIME This section indicates the date and time the data on the partition was recorded SERIAL This section indicates the serial number of the P2 card that originally contained the data on the partition VERIFY This section indicates the verification setting and results at the time the data on the partition was recorded ON FINISHED Verification was performed and the results agreed ON FAILED Verification was performed and the results did not agree OFF No verification was performed No verification information is available Notes Even for a FAT type hard disc drive the 1001st or later clips are not shown For a FAT formatted hard disc drive the information about only the first partition is shown For a P2 STORE AJ PCS060G that has an invalid partition that partitio
84. to be used in addition to the L M H standard gain settings the analog gain up S GAIN super gain mode to achieve a gain of 30 dB or more the cumulative gain up DS GAIN digital super gain mode which uses progressive drive and the LINE MIX GAIN mode where the gain of two lines is mixed To select these functions perform menu operations to open the lt USER SW GAIN gt screen from the CAM OPERATION page select the S GAIN item and DS GAIN item and preset the gain to be used for each item Furthermore select the LINE MIX function on the lt USER SW gt screen For instance if the S GAIN DS GAIN and LINE MIX GAIN functions have been allocated to the USER MAIN button USER1 button or USER2 button the gain can be increased by using these buttons in combination with the USER buttons 1 To increase the gain without increasing noise The DS GAIN function and the LINE MIX GAIN function are used 2 To increase the normal analog gain noise is increased Use the S GAIN feature alone Note Note that the accuracy of AUTO IRIS White Balance and Black Balance may be influenced by an increase in noise 3 To achieve ultra high sensitivity Use the S GAIN function and DS GAIN or LINE MIX GAIN function in combination However exercise care during operation since image lag will become more conspicuous with moving subjects the more the gain is increased by using the DS GAIN function When shooting moving subjects keep the gain increas
85. you hear a click Preparation Mounting the Camera on a Tripod Removing the Camera from the Tripod Adapter Tripod Adapter A Black Lever Red Lever While holding the red lever down move the black lever in the direction of the arrow and slide the camera backward to remove it Note If the tripod adapter pin does not return to its original position after the camera has been removed hold the red lever down and move the black lever in the direction of the arrow again in order to return the pin to its original position Please note that the camera cannot be mounted if the pin remains in the center Attaching the Shoulder Strap To detach the shoulder strap first open the hooks then Shoulder Strap detach the strap Note Make sure that the shoulder strap is securely attached Press to open the Preparation f Meza Pat cE QJ KI na amp aa a Was u A LS TNA a i tae Secure with the surface fastener Secure with the surface fastener Preparation Attaching the Shoulder Strap 97 Connection of the remote control unit AJ RC10G It is possible to control some of the functions remotely by connecting the remote control unit AJ RC10G optional accessory When AJ RC10G is connected to the REMOTE connector on the unit and the power switches of b
86. 00 conection ei green TABLE A when the GAIN switch is in the H BE silclu F R B position S C U F R 63 G YI 63 For performing the color saturation SAT 00 correction between green and yellow Note ae The items indicated by are the setting items for PAINT siclulF R 63 MENU SW m R W in the lt SD CARD R W SELECT gt fy 63 For performing the color saturation screen The items without are the setting items for SAT id correction of yellow PAINT MENU LEVEL R W PE Please refer to SD CARD R W SELECT page 169 for S C U F R 63 more information YI R 63 For performing the color saturation SAT 00 correction between yellow and red UU C U F R 63 The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode Menu Menu Menu Description Tables 147 LOW SETTING Items Adjustable Ranbrks D
87. 10G which is available as an optional accessory the unit can be controlled remotely Refer to page 98 i Confirmation of return video signals It is possible to confirm the return video signals analog HD Y signals in the HD mode VBS or Y signals in the SD mode supplied to the GENLOCK IN connector of AJ HPX2000 in the viewfinder to confirm programs Only video signals from the same record format can be confirmed Refer to page 160 HDC OUT connector The DC OUT connector of the unit produces 1 5 A of electrical current By connecting an external switch to this connector it is possible to control REC start stop Since a tally lamp can be used by connecting the LED to this connector it is useful for shooting video when fix ing the camera on a crane Refer to page 99 Other features H Viewfinder connection From the viewfinder connector of the unit 1080 59 94i 1080 50i 480 59 94i or 576 50i signals are output Furthermore signals are output for switching the fre quencies of the connected viewfinder Confirm images in multi formats by connecting the view finder AJ HVF21G which is available as an optional accessory Refer to page 26 While the AJ VF2OWBP 59 94 Hz E 50 Hz can also be connected you cannot view video in formats with dif ferent frequencies 10 General Features of the Input Output unit Hi User button On the side panel of the unit three user buttons USER MAIN USER1 USER2 are availa
88. 2CH Only recorded in CH1 and CH2 enabled when the front 4CH Recorded in all channels from CH1 microphone is selected lelulFl to CH4 W L The microphone low cut filter is Teer TONE ORE Select the test signal enabled only when the wireless A microphone is selected NORMAL OFF Disable test tone output ane ALWAYS NORMAL Test tone signals are output to REAR The microphone low cut filter is enabled only when the rear CHSEL all of Channels 1 4 when the z OUTPUT AUTO KNEE C U F miorophone is selected selector switch has been MIC LOWCUT OFF Select the microphone low cut filter for switched to BARS and CH1 of CH2 FRONT Input Channel 2 the AUDIO IN switch has been W L OFF The microphone low cut filter is switched to FRONT REAR disabled for any input ALWAYS Test tone signals are always FRONT The microphone low cut filter is output to all of Channels 1 4 enabled when the front when the OUTPUT AUTO microphone is selected KNEE selector switch has W L The microphone low cut filter is been switched to BARS enabled only when the wireless CHSEL Output test tone to the microphone is selected channels where the AUDIO IN REAR The microphone low cut filter is switch CH1 or CH2 is set to enabled only when the rear FRONT when OUTPUT AUTO c U F microphone is selected KNEE selector switch is set to MIC LOWCUT OFF Select the microphone low cut filter for C UI F oie E a E ISO CH3 FRONT Input Channel 3 P
89. 4 4 MHz 5 2 3 MHz 5 4 5 MHz IC UIFIR 3 3 5 MHZ 2D LPF ON For setting the 2 D low path filter OFF reducing cross colors ON Cross colors are reduced ICIUIFIR OFF Cross colors are not reduced SETUP 0 For setting the setup level for the down 15 converter output signals Only for 1080 59 94i or 720 59 94P Note When the system frequency is set to 50 clulF R Hz the setup level will be 0 Note The lt DOWNCON SETTING gt screen is displayed when SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080 59 94i 1080 50i 720 59 94P and 720 60P HD mode 144 Menu Menu Description Tables GENLOCK 1394 SETTING Items Adjustable Remarks Items _ Adjustable Bama DataSaved Range Data Saved Range GENLOCK JINT Switch the camera synchronising signal 1394 AUDIO CH1 CH2 For selecting the channels for audio EXT INT Synchronise with the internal OUT CH3 CH4 _ signals output from the DVCPRO DV reference signal regardless of the connector when the camera recorder is reference signal input to the operating in DVCPRO or DV mode for GENLOCK IN connector 480 59 94i or 576 50i only EXT Synchronise with the reference Note ICU F R E ea pose o EE P sound is GLPHASE HD SDI For selecting the output signals that lock A ae y EE output if the 25M REC CH SEL COMPOSIT phases to the signals that are inpu
90. 5 2 to 1 209 5 1080 25P 720 25P 576 25P Lens mount 2 3 inch bayonet type Color separation optical system Optical prism F1 4 Sensitivity F10 2000 Ix 89 9 reflection Minimum object illuminance 0 007 Ix For F1 4 48 dB S GAIN 20 dB DS GAIN 6 dB LINE MIX GAIN Video S N 54 dB standard Registration error 0 03 or less all areas excluding lens distortion Specifications Specifications 175 Memory Card Unit Record media P2 card Video recording formats Selectable from DVCPRO HD DVCPROS50 DVCPRO and DV Audio recording formats 48 kHz 16 bit 4ch DVCPRO HD DVCPROS50 48 kHz 16 bit 2ch 4ch selectable DVCPRO DV Recording playback time Approximately 8 minutes For recording in DVCPRO HD 1080 60i mode using one AJ P2CO08HG Approximately 32 minutes For recording in DVCPRO 480 60i mode using one AJ P2CO08HG Note This recording time represents one shot continuously recorded on a P2 card The recording time may be shorter depending on the number of shots recorded For the latest information on P2 cards not available in the operating Instructions visit the P2 Support Desk at the following Web sites https eww pavc panasonic co jp pro av 176 Specifications Digital Video System Frequency range Y 74 1758 MHz 59 94 Hz 74 25 MHz 50 Hz DVCPRO HD PB PR 37 0879 MHz 59 94 Hz 37 125 MHz 50 Hz DVCPRO HD y 13 5 MHz DVCPRO50 PB PR 6 75
91. 50P and the REC MODE menu superimposed on the VF signal option is set to DVCPRO50 the upper Displays the menu when menu 2 limit of the above recording time is 8 IcJulFl characters are superimposed lelulFl seconds MONITOR VBS Select the output signal on the MON OUT OUT connector LOOP REC JON Select whether or not to enable LOOP Mi VBS Output a regular composite signal MODE OFF REC VF Output a VF Y signal The status This setting can be used with PRE display is also superimposed RECORDING features Y Output a component Y signal ON Enable LOOP REC EU El OFF Disable LOOP REC MONITOR ON Select whether or not to superimpose Note OUTCHAR OFF characters on the MON OUT connector After the power is turned off this item signal independently of the camera s will default to OFF the next time the VIDEO OUT CHARACTER switch The Joelle power is turned on character content is the same as the video output signal REC START ALL Select operating modes that allow ON Enable superimpose NORMAL jrecording to start lelulF OFF Disable superimpose ALL Allow recording to start during stop recording pause and LCD MON ON Select whether or not to superimpose playback CHAR OFF characters on the LCD monitor The NORMAL character content is the same as the Allow recording to start during stop video output signal lelulFl and recording pause ON Enable superimpose Not interlocked with the VIDEO PONREC HOL
92. 7 Incorrect audio signals are being input to the Continues with no sound blinks every two seconds DVCPRO DV connector No signal is supplied to the DVCPRO DV While the recording mode connector continues no data is recorded on 1394 E 90 cards unless the abnormal condition is corrected If an error has occurred before recording then recording does not start With the menu option REC MODE set to DV Stops 1394 E 91 copy guard information signals for recording prohibited data are being input to the DVCPRO DV connector The DVCPRO DV connector is not properly No recording in 1394 input mode 1394 E 92 connected The viewfinder indicates the can be performed message 1394 INITIAL ERROR 1 36 Maintenance and Inspections Warning System Menu Configuration MENU m USER MENU MAIN MENU SYSTEM SETTING SYSTEM MODE OPTION MODE PAINT RB GAIN CONTROL REC FUNCTION OPTION MENU RGB BLACK CONTROL OUTPUT SEL MATRIX DOWNCON SETTING OPTION COLOR CORRECTION LCD MONITOR LOW SETTING IL GENLOCK MID SETTING L 1394 SETTING HIGH SETTING ADDITIONAL DTL SKIN TONE DTL KNEE LEVEL gt GAMMA C L CAMERA SETTING VF VF DISPLAY VF MARKER CAM OPERATION t _ CAMERA ID VF USER BOX SHUTTER SPEED VF INDICATOR1 SHUTTER SELECT VF INDICATOR2 USER SW MODE CHECK IND L SW MODE
93. AR END SD EOM SD PROXY CARD ERROR SD CARD WRITE ERR CANNOT DISP IN VF Something abnormal is happening to the internal computer communications or reference signal No further recording or playback can be performed is replaced with an error code For more information see Error Codes page 136 P2 card has been removed while being accessed recorded played back or formatted and subsequent operation is disabled An error has occurred while recording data to or playing data from a P2 card In the actual indication the is replaced by the slot number of the P2 card that triggered the error Something abnormal is happening to video and or audio being recorded Backup battery needs replacing The fan is locked and halted RF signal from the wireless receiver is degraded P2 card has no free space Playback position is at the start of all the clips Playback position is at the end of all the clips The P2 card is not recordable Detailed information is provided on the FUNCTION screen of MODE CHECK See the relevant section of the MODE CHECK indication area Clip cannot be played back perhaps because no P2 card is loaded or the P2 card contains no clips Displayed when disconnection between microcomputers continues for a specified period or longer Text memo has been added Text memo has not been successfully added Shot mark been added or deleted For information on shot marks see Shot Mark Function page 35
94. ATRIX R B 63 For performing the linear matrix S C U F R 63 adjustment red blue Mg 63 For performing the color 00 SAT 00 saturationcorrection of magenta C U F R 63 ea MATRIXG R 63 For performing the linear matrix S C U F R 63 60 adjustment green red Mg B 63 For performing the color saturation es SAT 00 correction between magenta and blue C U F R 63 ane MATRIXG B 63 For performing the linear matrix S C U F R 63 00 adjustment green blue B 63 For performing the color saturation iaag SAT 00 correction of blue S C U F R 63 pa MATRIXB R 63 For performing the linear matrix S C U F R 63 0 adjustment blue red B Cy 63 For performing the color saturation SAT 00 correction between blue and cyan S C U F R 63 pe MATRIXB G 63 For performing the linear matrix S C U F R 63 a0 adjustment blue green Cy 63 For performing the color saturation ae SAT 00 correction of cyan S C U F R 63 mea mLMATRIX OFF For selecting the color correction table S C U F R 63 TABLE A when the GAIN switch is in the L Cy G 63 For performing the color saturation S C U F R B position SAT 00 correction between cyan and green 90 mM MATRIX OFF For selecting the color correction table TABLE A when the GAIN switch is in the M S C U F R 63 S C U FIRIB position G 63 For performing the color saturation mH MATRIX OFF For selecting the color correction table SAT 4
95. C Can be saved or read using CARD READ WRITED U Can be saved and read as user data GENLOCK IN connector In SD Please refer to SCENE and INITIALIZE mode only F Can be read using READ FACTORY DATA 1394 Record the signal from the 1394 Please refer to INITIALIZE input connector R Can be saved using RC DATA SAVE SDI Records input to the SD IN Please refer to Connection of the remote control unit AJ RC10G page 98 ICIU FIR connector optional This section shows the About the settings available for adjustable range of the this item set value and available options for this item Menu Menu Configuration 137 USER MENU USER MENU is factory set The menu can be configured to suit your preferences by specifying each option according to your purposes and frequency of use through the lt USER MENU SELECT gt screen which is accessible from the MAIN MENU page For more information see Selecting Options for USER MENU page 140 To display USER MENU press the MENU button MAIN MENU Allows you to set all options on the settings menu This menu has a_category by category structure layered according to purposes and frequency of use To display MAIN MENU press the MENU button for three seconds or longer SYSTEM SETTING This option is used to specify recording signal recording system etc PAINT This option is used t
96. D Select the recording order of the slot OUT CHARACTER switch SLOT SEL SLOT1 when the power is turned on OFF Disable superimpose HOLD Not interlocked with the VIDEO The recording order starts with the OUT CHARACTER switch card previously selected when the C U F power was turned off VF MODE MEM When the REC SIGNAL menu option on SLOT1 CAM the SYSTEM MODE screen is set to The recording order starts with the CAM select the image to display in the card that is inserted in Slot 1 when the viewfinder C U F i power is turned on MEM Display the playback image in the playback mode IclulfF CAM Always display the camera image THUMBNAIL ON Select whether or not to output clip OUT OFF thumbnails displayed on the LCD monitor to the video output and monitor output signals ON Enable output OFF Disable output Note HD SDI signals are being output from the VIDEO OUT connector thumbnails _IclulFl_ are not output The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode Menu Menu Description Tables 143 DOWNCON SETTING LCD MONITOR Items Adjustable Remarks Items Adjustable Rerh rke Data Saved Range Data Saved Range DOWNCON SQUEEZ For setting the mode of the down BRIGHTNE
97. DED ACCESSORIES ONLY CAUTIONS In order to maintain adequate ventilation do not install or place this unit in a bookcase built in cabinet or any other confined space To prevent risk of electric shock or fire hazard due to overheating ensure that curtains and any other materials do not obstruct the ventilation CAUTION This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help The user may find the booklet Something Abou
98. ECK button when BATT cluUlF NEAR END ALARM is triggered BATTEND JON Select whether or not to set the alarm to ALARM OFF beep for BATT END ALARM CIU F BATT REMAIN 70 Set the display content of the remaining FULL 100 battery capacity indicator bars in the display window when using a digital battery 70 Indicate FULL at 70 capacity clulFl 100 Indicate FULL at 100 capacity Menu Menu Description Tables 163 BATTERY SETTING1 164 Menu Menu Description Tables preset mode Items Adjustable Banarks Items Adjustable H imarks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range PROPAC14 Enable selection under BATTERY DIONIC160 Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT SELECT gt Enable selection gt Enable selection e Disable selection e Disable selection AUTO Select auto or manual to set the NEAR AUTO Select auto or manual to set the NEAR MANUAL END voltage MANUAL END voltage AUTO Set voltage automatically AUTO Set voltage automatically MANUAL Set voltage manually MANUAL Set voltage manually 11 0 When MANUAL is selected in the above 11 0 When MANUAL is selected in the menu menu set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 above set the NEAR END v
99. ECT Then press the dial button CONFIG NG Insert an SD memory card 3 NO CARD Turn the JOG dial button to select a desired number No SD memory card inserted 1 8 Then press the dial button CONFIG NG The card may be defective ERROR Replace the card To give the selected file a title CONFIG NG WRITE PROTECT SD memory card is write Remove the card and cancel the protect 4 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option TITLE protected lt SD CARD READ WRITE gt CONFIG NG Example The SD memory card R SELECT a CANNOT ACCCESS is not accessible because it is ener d SD memory card not being played back WRITE ioni CARD CONFIG accessible After the operation in process TITLE READ format the card 5 gt TITLE To exit the menu press the MENU button 1 GEANE a eae The settings menu disappears and the status of the Bi ottttteee Ti oreeeesss unit is indicated at the top and bottom of the is es viewfinder screen 5 Press the JOG dial button This moves the cursor to the entry area putting the unit in entry mode Note If an SD memory card is inserted or removed with the SD CARD READ MWRITE lt SD CARD READ WRITE gt screen open the data i 7 title cannot be edited ae of Move the cursor to the option TITLE READ and press were 4 the JOG dial button CARD CONFIG F TITLE READ Edit the data title TITLE PaT Na EE S auk WuA
100. Executive Office One Panasonic Way 4E 7 Secaucus NJ 07094 201 348 7000 EASTERN ZONE One Panasonic Way 4E 7 Secaucus NJ 07094 201 348 7196 Southeast Region 201 348 7162 WESTERN ZONE 3330 Cahuenga Blvd W Los Angeles CA 90068 323 436 3500 Government Marketing Department One Panasonic Way 2E 10 Secaucus NJ 07094 201 348 7587 Broadcast PARTS INFORMATION amp ORDERING 9 00 a m 5 00 p m EST 800 334 4881 24 Hr Fax 800 334 4880 Emergency after hour parts orders 800 334 4881 TECHNICAL SUPPORT Emergency 24 Hour Service 800 222 0741 Panasonic Canada Inc 5770 Ambler Drive Mississauga Ontario L4W 2T3 905 624 5010 Panasonic de Mexico S A de C V Av angel Urraza Num 1209 Col de Valle 03100 Mexico D F 52 1 951 2127 Panasonic Puerto Rico Inc San Gabriel Industrial Park 65th Infantry Ave Km 9 5 Carolina Puerto Rico 00630 787 750 4300 Professional amp Broadcast IT Systems Business Unit Europe Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH Hagenauer Str 43 65203 Wiesbaden Biebrich Deutschland Tel 49 61 1 235 481 2006 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co Ltd All Rights Reserved P
101. FPGA SH4CTRL Display the program version for the ee FPGA streaming control FPGA CHAR FPGA Displays the version of the program for me oe ee ee the HD signal I O control FPGA PRCCTRL Displays the version of the program for pa PS Fa a FPGA the prerecording control FPGA DC FPGA Displays the version of the program for STE the SD signal I O control FPGA SYSIF FPGA Display the program version for the a s serial interface FPGA SDI IN FPGA Displays the version of the program for the SDI board FPGA optional 172 Menu Menu Description Tables HOURS METER Items Adjustable Remark Data Saved Range OPERATION Display total hours the camera power has been turned ON PON TIMES Display total number of times the power switch has been turned ON IN OPTION MENU OPTION Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range ENG ON Select whether or not to prohibit opening SECURITY OFF the menu screen ON Menu screen cannot be opened Please consult your distributor to release the setting OFF Menu screen can be opened TOTAL 40 For setting the chroma level of the PR CHROMA Pe signals and the Ps signals GAIN a c 40 CHROMA ON When this is set to OFF the color OUTPUT OFF elements of the video signals are
102. G page Switch Setting When a battery and P2 cards are installed set the switches as detailed below before starting to use your unit Setting the switches before shooting and recording USER MAIN AUDIO SELECT This switch is factory set to CH 1 CH 2 perform slot selection AUTO CAM AUTO KNEE ON Normally this should be set to 0 dB If conditions are too dark an appropriate gain level should be set Iris Auto Notes The USER MAIN button is factory set to perform the slot selection function which selects the target card from among several P2 cards When a new target P2 card is selected the appropriate slot number appears on the P2 card remaining amount indicator in the viewfinder For more information about the indications in the viewfinder see Viewfinder Status Indication Layout page 62 SLOT SEL function is enabled during recording however a few seconds are required for switching slots When the target P2 card is switched during recording further switching to a different P2 card cannot be accepted for over 20 seconds after the first switch The ability to switch to a different target P2 card using the SLOT SEL function is not available over 20 seconds after recording starts Shooting White Black Balance Adjustment to Recording Comple tion For shooting follow the steps below 1 Select a filter according to light conditions 2A When the white balance is saved Position the WHITE
103. Hirose Denki 2 NC 3 NC J 4 12V F 4 O2 30 O O Note Ensure that the polarities are used correctly for a power supply from an external source Matsushita part number K1AB105B0002 PRONT MIEN Maker part number NC5FBH 1 GND NEUTRIK 2 L CHIN H 3 L CHIN C 4 RCHIN H 5 R CHIN C AUDIO TN rma aaa eee 1 GND Hirose Denki 2 AUDIO IN H 3 AUDIO IN C PUSH AUDIO OUT Maker part number HA16RD 5P 76 Hirose Denki 1 GND 2 L CH OUT H 3 L CH OUT C 4 R CH OUT H 5 R CH OUT C Matsushita part number K1AY104J0002 Maker part number HR10A 7R 4S 74 Hirose Denki Connector at the cable side Maker part number HR10A 7R 4P 73 Hirose Denki Maintenance and Inspections Maintenance and Inspections Maintenance 129 REMOTE 1 CAM DATA H Data from the camera to the remote control H 2 CAM DATA C Data from the camera to the remote control C 3 CAM CONT H Control signals from the remote control to the camera H 4 CAM CONT C Control signals from the remote control to the camera C 5 RC ON Identification signals of the remote control Low ON 6 RC VIDEO OUT Video signals output to the remote control 7 RC VIDEO GND GND of the video signals to the rem
104. ID1 ID3 58 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting Time Data Setting UMID Information The unit supports UMID metadata You need to specify as UMID information the country where you live using up to three characters organisation or company up to four characters and user name up to four characters For the country name you must use abbreviations prescribed in the ISO3166 Country Code Here are some examples of the correct method for specifying a user name 1 Examples China CHN WR N U S A USA Canada CAN Japan JPN lt UMID SET INFO gt OWNER COUNTRY beckons ORGANIZATION USER Sey DEVICE NODE L Go to the lt UMID SET INFO gt screen from the MAIN OPERATION page Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option USER Press the JOG dial button The cursor moves to the user entry area allowing you to enter a user name Turn the JOG dial button until a desired character appears The characters appear in the following order Space o Y Alphabetical characters A to Z v Numerals 0to9 v Symbols gt lt Note The COUNTRY entry can only include alphabetical characters and spaces Press the JOG dial button to accept a desired character Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the next digit clockwise and repeat Steps 4 to 5 to set characters To change an input character go back to step 3 When
105. IDEO OUT connector MON OUT connector or AUDIO OUT connector differ from the actual input signals Use them for monitoring purposes The condition indicator character is not shown in the viewfinder screen and the output images The following functions are not available PRE RECORDING function Loop recording Proxy recording function Time code and user bits When input from the IEEE1394 interface is being received the time code and or the user bits input from the TC IN connector cannot be recorded on the P2 card When input from the IEEE1394 interface is being received the time code output from TC OUT will not be synchronized with the images output from the MON OUT connector Timecode and user bits in the subcode SBC area When input from the IEEE1394 interface is being received the timecode in the SBC area which is input from the DVCPRO DV connector is recorded on the P2 card by turning the TCG switch to the F RUN position and it will also be output from the TC OUT connector of camera recorder By turning the TCG switch into the R RUN position the timecode in the SBC area will be recorded on the P2 card in accordance with the timecode of the clip recorded on the P2 card When recording the user bits input from the DVCPRO DV connector on the P2 card open the lt TC UB gt screen on the MAIN OPEATION page from the menu and select the EXT at UB MODE Timecode and user bits in the VAUX area
106. IN The unit will display a marker to help with focusing when The unit uses the storage type gain increase function by shooting videos This function provides a visual cue for driving the CCD progressively With this function it is focusing Refer to page 44 possible to obtain brighter pictures without increasing noise under low light conditions This is a function that makes it possible to achieve higher sensitivity of up to 20 dB above the regular gain increase Furthermore this function can also be used as picture effects General Features of Camera unit 7 8 i Data management function Within the unit one user data file and four sets of scene file data can be saved By using an SD memory card as the setup cart up to eight sets of setup data can be stored Refer to page 74 Wi Color bar The unit employs the SMPTE color bar ARIB color bar Split color bar for SNG Satellite News Gathering as well as the conventional color bar which is useful for adjusting the color monitor Refer to page 160 Features of Recorder player unit Hi Multiple Slots AJ HPX2000 is equipped with five slots for P2 cards Up to five cards may be inserted in these slots for continu ous recording They also provide new recording capabil ities specific to memory cards Hot Swap recording The Hot Swap capability allows cards not in use to be replaced without interrupting recording This facilitates continuous recording Loop recor
107. INE MIX GAIN display DE AK AK AK AL AL AL ALAL IL OKONO JLI 24 Audio input channel and level meter All 4ch input information 25 Super black ON 26 Super iris ON 27 Iris override indication 28 Iris F value 29 Zoom indication OJOJOJOJO O IOIOIOIOIOIOIOIO OJOJOJOJO O JOJOJOJOJOJOJO JOJO JOJOJOJOJOJOJOJO O IOIOIOIOJO 30 PRE RECORDING indication SD memory card remaining free space MODE CHECK 31 Compression mode O O O O 1 the VF page Provided regardless of the menu option setting 68 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder Screen Status Displays Not provided when the menu option STATUS is set to OFF which can be found in the lt MODE CHK IND gt screen accessible from a Display Modes and Setting Changes adjustment Result Messages The messages that appear on the viewfinder screen to indicate changes to settings and adjustment results may lt VF DISPLAY gt be limited or set not to appear through the menu option A DISP MODE This menu option can be found in the lt VF T DISPLAY gt screen which is accessible from the VF page ZEBRA1 DETECT ZEBRA2 DETECT For directions on navigating the menu see Setting Menu ZEBRA2 Options page 139 LOW LIGHT LVL ECU MENU DISP 50M INDICATOR MARKER CHAR LVL NORMAL 3 Ri 73 070 085 SPOT 135 OFF OFF 50
108. ION2 For setting the shutter speed for POSITION6 For setting the shutter speed for z SEL POSITION 2 SEL POSITION 6 C For 59 94 Hz 1 100 For 59 94 Hz 1 100 1 120 1 120 1 250 1 250 1 500 1 500 1 1000 1 1000 1 2000 1 2000 HALF HALF For50Hz 1 60 For 50Hz 1 60 1 120 1 120 1 250 1 250 1 500 1 500 1 1000 1 1000 1 2000 1 2000 C U Fj HALF C U Fj HALF POSITIONS For setting the shutter speed for SEL POSITION 3 The _____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the For 59 94 Hz 1 100 preset mode 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 HALF For50Hz 1 60 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 C U F HALF POSITION4 For setting the shutter speed for SEL POSITION 4 For 59 94 Hz 1 100 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 HALF For50Hz 1 60 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 C U F HALF Menu Menu Description Tables 159 USER SW SW MODE Items Adjustable Remarka Items Adjustable Rerh rke Data Saved Range Data Saved Range USER MAIN INH Allocate the USER MAIN button For RET SW R REVIEW For setting the function when the USER SW S GAIN descriptions of the functions see CAM RET button on the unit to which the RET DS GAIN Assigning Functions to USER MAIN D ZOOM button of the lens or the RET SW LINE MIX USER1 and USER2 Buttons page 44 function is allocated is pressed S IRIS R REVIEW
109. J SC900 P2 Cards Hard carrying case AJ P2C004HG AJ HT901G SD Memory cards STAU For the latest information on P2 cards and SD memory cards not available in the operating Instructions visit the P2 Support Desk at the following Web sites https eww pavc panasonic co jp pro av 12 General System Configuration Parts and their Functions Power Supply and Accessory Mounting Section Qg o Ua 1 POWER switch Used to turn on off the power 2 Battery mount A battery pack from Anton Bauer is mounted here 3 DC IN external power input socket XLR 4P camera recorder is connected to an external DC power supply 4 BREAKER switch When an excessive amount of current is fed through the camera recorder due to any abnormal event the breaker automatically turns off the power in order to protect the device After the interior of the camera recorder has been checked and or repaired this button must be depressed If there is no unusual reaction the unit can be powered up 5 GPS connector This connects the optional GPS unit AJ GPS900G 6 Shoulder strap fittings The shoulder strap is attached here 7 Light shoe A video light or similar accessory can be attached here 8 Lens mount bayonet 2 3 type The lens is attached here 9 Lens lever Lower this lever to lock the lens to the lens mount 10 11 12 13 14 15 of 14 12 13 Lens mount cap To r
110. KNEE SLOPE 50 The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode HCAMERA SETTING Items Adjustable Rem rke Data Saved Range DETAIL ON For switching ON OFF of the detail OFF signals SIC U F R 2D LPF ON For specifying whether or not to enable OFF or disable the 2 dimension LPF which reduce the cross color for the SD mode only Note In PAL mode the 2 dimension LPF is siclulF rR disable HIGH COLOR ON ON OFF switching for the HIGH COLOR OFF mode which enhances the color S C UIF R dynamic range GAMMA ON For switching ON OFF of the gamma OFF correction s C U F R TEST SAW JON Switch the test signal ON or OFF 5 OFF 5 SIC U F R FLARE ON Set the flare correction to ON or OFF OFF S C U F R H F COMPE ON For switching ON OFF of the aperture OFF correction S C U F R Note All items in CAMERA SETTING are setting targets of the item PAINT MENU SW m R W in the lt SD CARD R W SELECT gt screen The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode Menu Menu Description Tables 153 I vF VF DISPLAY Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range DISP NORMAL NORMAL Display status constantly CONDITION HOLD HOLD Display status only wh
111. L 60iB REAR MIC CH2 LEVEL 60iB REAR LINE IN LVL 41B AUDIO OUT LVL 41B HEADROOM 20dB WIRELESS WARN OFF 46 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting Recording Levels Il Adjusting Recording Levels To adjust the recording levels for Audio Channels 1 and 2 follow the steps below 1 Position the MONITOR SELECT CH1 2 CH3 4 selector switch at CH1 2 so that the audio level meter on the display window will provide CH1 and CH2 indications Ensure that the channel indications displayed in the window are 1 and 2 Whether to enable or disable the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control must be preset through menu options FRONT VR CH1 and FRONT VR CH2 Note that this control is factory disabled The menu options are found in the MIC AUDIO1 screen which is accessible from the MAIN OPERATION page Position the AUDIO SELECT CH1 CH2 switch at MAN 3 While checking the audio channel level meter in the display window or the audio level meter in the viewfinder adjust the AUDIO LEVEL CH1 CH2 control Note that if the level exceeds the top bar 0 dB the word OVER illuminates to show that the input level is excessive The adjustment made in such a way that the maximum level will not reach the 0 dB bar Audio level meter on the display window cover NDF SLAVE HOLD W HDVGPSY CTL VTCG TIME DATE P REC oo oo oo oO COLO COL LULt COL h Y minM sD MEDIA E mm m
112. L MENU button and Select META DATA LOAD from the thumbnail menu and press the SET button INITIALIZE PROPERTY LANGUAGE EXIT z 00 00 45 12 00 09 44 03 00 00 00 00 EA 480 60i Dur 00 00 50 11 4 Names of metadata upload files stored on the SD memory card are displayed Select the desired files using the cursor buttons and choose YES Upload starts Uploaded metadata is retained even if the power is turned off For more information on confirmation of uploaded data see Checking and modifying read metadata page 110 Clip Meta Data items Clip Meta Data includes the following items Underlined items can be set by reading the metadata upload file on the SD memory card Other items are set automatically during shooting Using the latest update version of P2 viewer metadata upload files can be written to SD memory cards using a PC Download the latest update version of P2 viewer from the following URL and install it to your PC http panasonic biz sav p2 Regarding SD memory cards to be used see lt Cautions in using SD memory cards gt page 20 Note The file which was edited by except P2 viewer is displayed as UNKNOWN DATA and may not be read GLOBAL CLIP ID Displays the global clip ID which indicates the shooting status of the clip USER CLIP NAME Displays the clip name specified by the user VIDEO Displays FRAME RATE frame rate of the clip PULL DOWN and ASPECT RATIO
113. LE A for the linear matrix TABLE A for the linear matrix C U F R B s c uU FIRIB mCOLOR ON For switching ON OFF of the 12 axis mCOLOR ON For switching ON OFF of the 12 axis CORRECT OFF independent color correction CORRECT OFF independent color correction S C U F R S C U F R Note The items indicated by are the setting items for PAINT MENU SW m R W in the lt SD CARD R W SELECT gt screen The items without E are the setting items for PAINT MENU LEVEL R W Please refer to SD CARD R W SELECT page 169 for more information The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode Menu Menu Menu Description Tables 149 ADDITIONAL DTL Items Adjustable Baars Data Saved Range KNEE APE OFF For changing the detail level of the high LVL 1 brightness portion 2 5 S C U F R DTL GAIN 31 Adjust the detail level toward upwards 00 up C U F R 31 DTL GAIN 31 Adjust the detail level toward the downwards 00 C U F R 31 DTL CLIP 00 For setting the level for clipping the 63 detail signals S C U F R DTL SOURCE R G 2 For setting the proportion of the RGB G B 2 signal components that provide the 2G R B 4 detail 3G R 4 R S C U F R G VDTLFREQ 360TV For selecting the vertical detail 450TV frequency In HD mode only 540TV It is enabled when the rec
114. MEMO IND WIDE IND PROXY IND Da PL Deuces THUMBNAIL SIZE a SETUP THUMBNAIL INIT EXIT META DATA HDD LOAD EXPORT RECORD EXPLORE USER CLIP NAME FORMAT INITIALIZE SETUP PROPERTY EXIT LANGUAGE EXIT 100 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Thumbnail Manipulations Overview Thumbnail Screen Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail screen on the LCD monitor Pressing the THUMBNAIL button again returns the display to the regular display When switching is done from the regular screen display to the thumbnail screen display all the clips will be displayed on the thumbnail screen Pressing the MENU button allows you to navigate the thumbnail menu Note With the TCG switch positioned at SET when the time code or user bits are set or when camera menus are being manipulated thumbnails cannot be manipulated 00 00 00 00 00 00 55 11 00 01 28 07 _00 02 08 07 05 os 08 eee amp o t7 TA s 00 02 33 26 00 03 51 04 00 04 48 26 00 06 47 11 3 00 09 44 03 11 12 13 14 15 1 Display Mode The type of the thumbnail indicated on the display and the types of the other information screens are indicated ALL Display all clips SAME FORMAT The clips in the same format as the system format are shown SELECT The clips selected with the SET button are shown MARKER Display clips with shot marks TEXT MEMO Display clips with text memo data SLOT n Display clips in the specified P2 card
115. MHz DVCPRO50 Quantization 8 bits Video compression ratio DVCPRO HD DVCPROSO DVCPRO DV Video recording bit rate DVCPRO HD DVCPROSO DVCPRO DV Digital Audio System Sampling frequency 1 6 7 not in 1080 50i 25P mode 1 6 3 in 1080 50i 25P mode 1 3 3 1 5 100 Mbps 50 Mbps 25 Mbps 48 kHz synchronised with video Quantizing 16 bits Frequency response 20 Hz 20 kHz 1 0 dB at standard level Dynamic range Distortion factor Headroom 20 dB Minimum 85 dB 1 kHz AWTD 0 1 or less 1 kHz standard level Input output Unit GEN LOCK IN MON OUT VIDEO OUT TC IN TC OUT DVCPRO DV SDI IN Accessories Shoulder Strap BNCx1 1 0 VP P 75 Q This is available as VIDEO IN or the return video input connector which can be switched in the menu BNC x1 1 0 VP P 75 Q BNC x1 1 0 VP P 75 Q It can be switched among HD SDI SD SDI Composite HD SDI 0 8 VP P 75 Q Compliant with the SMPTE292M 296M 299M standards SD SDI 0 8 VP P 75 Q Compliant with the SMPTE259M C 272M A ITU R BT656 4 standards Composite 1 0 VP P 75 Q BNC x1 0 5 VP P to 8 VP P 10 KQ BNC x1 low impedance 2 0 0 5 VP P 6 pins I O Transmission rate 400 200 or 100 Mbps selectable Transmission data compliant with IEEE1394 1995 1394a 2000 IEC 61883 1 and 2 and SMPTE 396M Control commands compliant with the AV C Command Set standards BNC x1 0 8 VP P
116. O or TAKE NO 3 Be sure to enter TEXT when entering MEMO It is not possible to record only PERSON or OFFSET DEVICE SHOOT NEWS Note AJ HPX2000 only displays printable ASCII characters Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Setting of Clip Meta Data 109 p Checking and modifying read metadata The camera recorder allows you to check the details of read metadata 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor 2 Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button to select METADATA PROPERTY from the thumbnail menu Then the screen like this is displayed META DATA Al Hor REC META DATA REC ON META NAME TEST DATA CREATOR LAST UPDATE PERSON SHOOT PLACE NAME SCENARIO NEWS MEMO Ts ca 3 Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer Then press the SET button This allows you to view the settings of the read metadata 7 fl Cr USER CLIP NAME META NAME x LASILLA ATE 1 TEST DA ERSON PROGRAM NAME TEST SCENE NO 3 TAKE NO 10 META DATA REC META DATA REC ON DVCPRO U 4 While viewing the settings for the metadata use the cursor buttons to move the pointer to the desired option Then press the SET button A software keyboard screen is displayed allowing you to modify the setting META DATA Al Hor REC META DATA USER CLIP NAME To set whether or not the uploaded metadata is recorded
117. OG dial button to display the following message READ ES YES viit Py gt ARPES Adjustments and Settings for Recording a 4 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES Then press the dial button The data written in the user area of the internal memory of the unit is read to complete the setting 5 To exit the menu press the MENU button The set user data may be also read without navigating the menu 1 Turn off the POWER switch 2 Position the WHITE BAL switch at PRST WHITE BAL Switch 3 With the AUTO W B BAL switch flipped up turn on the POWER switch This resets all settings for USER menu options to their defaults Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data 79 E How to Use Scene File Data It is possible to write the settings data into the scene file area of the internal memory of the unit or to read data written in this area Four types of scene files are available This data allows you to quickly reproduce an optimum setup state To change the settings go to the lt SCENE gt screen from the FILE page To write settings data for scene files 1 Navigate the menu to the SCENE screen 2 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the SCENE SEL option 3 Press the JOG dial button to blink scene file numbers Then turn the dial button to select a desired scene file number lt SCENE gt READ USER DATA SCENE SEL Ha READ WRITE RESET
118. PRE REC Recording a PC MODE SIGNAL MODE MODE Text Memo Sot Mark optional USB device a Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled DEVICE USB host USB HOST _ Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled 1394 Input record 1394 Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled r y LOOP REC OFF CAMERA ON 1s 85 155 Disabled Disabled Disabled VIDEO SDI optional Enabled P ie Normal Recording optional OFF 1s 8s 155 Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled for color bars Recording and Playback Shot Mark Function Recording and Playback 35 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Multi Format I Video system and Recording format The unit employs a progressive scan full pixel reading CCD system With combinations of the SYSTEM MODE and CAMERA MODE menu options on the SYSTEM MODE screen on the SYSTEM SETTING menu page you can select a recording format from among 17 types including HD 1080i 720P and SD formats In any recording format the CCD operates in progressive non interlace scan mode In addition through the REC SIGNAL menu option you can record external input signals such as 1394 and SDI optional E Selecting a recording signal and method SYSTEM MODE menu option Allows you to select a combination of system frequency 59 94 or 50 Hz and signaling system 1080i 720P 480i or 576i When a change has been made to the SYSTEM MODE option the vie
119. Panasonic Operating Instructions Memory Card Camera Recorder kA m a ROO ee OH WA 50 Before operating this product please read the insructions carefully and save this manual for future use F1206T0 F D ENGLISH Printed in Japan VQT1D27 Read this first CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER TO SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance service instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD KEEP THIS EQUIPMENT AWAY FROM ALL LIQUIDS USE AND STORE ONLY IN LOCATIONS WHICH ARE NOT EXPOSED TO THE RISK OF DRIPPING OR SPLASHING LIQUIDS AND DO NOT PLACE ANY LIQUID CONTAINERS ON TOP OF THE EQUIPMENT CAUTIONS TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD AND ANNOYING INTERFERENCE USE THE RECOMMEN
120. Placing the Camera recorder in SYNCHRO SCAN Mode To place the camera recorder in SYNCHRO SCAN mode SYNCHRO SCAN ADJUSTMENT buttons follow the steps below lt lt lt 1 Press the SHUTTER switch positioned at ON towards SEL to place the camera recorder in SYNCHRO SCAN mode 2 In the SYNCHRO SCAN mode it is possible to change the shutter speed continuously by operating the SYNCHRO SCAN and buttons SHUTTER switch Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting the Electronic Shutter 43 Assigning Functions to USER MAIN USER1 and USER2 Buttons The USER MAIN USER1 and USER2 buttons can be D ZOOM assigned user selected functions To select desired functions use the menu options USER MAIN SW USER1 SW and USER2 SW These options can be found in the lt USER SW gt screen which is accessible from the CAM OPERATION page ATW lt USER SW gt Y GET USER MAIN SW SLOT SEL USER1 SW S GAIN USER2 SW DS GAIN DRS Selectable Functions INH No function assigned S GAIN S GAIN function assigned DS GAIN DS GAIN function assigned LINE MIX GAIN LINE MIX GAIN function 6 dB assigned S IRIS Super Iris function assigned This is useful for backlight compensation LOVR Iris Override function assigned The target reference value in Auto Iris ASSIST mode must be changed To change the target value put the unit into this mode and press the JOG dial
121. R zoom function COLOR TEMP 2300K For setting the color temperature when RC CHECK R REVIEW For specifying what the camera recorder PoE 5200K MEANT E BAE omen ae SEL tohe sw PLAY does when the REC check button on the aie PRST position remote control unit is pressed 8000K Since the range of color temperatures R REVIEW The camera recorder that can be set will vary with the CC performs rec review filter position a numerical value PLAY The camera recorder cannot be changed even if the color TelulelR performs playback temperature is changed when a high J Fl color temperature is set AWB A TEMP 2300K For setting the color temperature when the WHITE BAL switch is set to the A WHITE BALANCE MODE 3200K position 5000K If the automatic adjustment of white balance is executed in the A position Items Adjustable Remarks the color temperature at that time is Data Saved Range memorized in the position of the WHITE FILTERINH JON For selecting independently whether BAL switch A If the white balance has OFF memory data for white balance Ach been automatically adjusted or the CC Bch is retained or not for the respective filter has been switched then up to CC filters _ _ _ F 9000K may be indicated ON Regardless of the CC filter data for the memories 2 memories for Ach AWB B TEMP 2300K For setting the color temperature when and Bch is retained the WHITE BAL switch is set to the B OFF The memory data 8 memories
122. S GAIN Whether LINE MIX GAIN is ON or OFF Whether S IRIS is ON or OFF Iris override can be set the IRIS OVERRIDE setting is ON Status of SUPER BLACK ON or OFF When it is ON the set value is also indicated Status of BLACK GAMMA shade correction for the black level ON or OFF Input signal to be recorded on Audio Channel 1 has been switched Input signal to be recorded on Audio Channel 2 has been switched USER button acts as REC switch Y GET function ON USER button acts as RET switch ATW being performed Magnification of digital zoom Switch that changes the target card is set Indicates that PRE RECORDING mode has been switched ON or OFF USB action status has been switched Indicates whether the dynamic range stretcher function is ON or OFF Indicates whether the focus assist function is ON or OFF Indicates the mode for changing the color temperature with the JOG dial button is ON or OFF Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder Screen Status Displays Adjustments and Settings for Recording 65 Information Item Indication Status 13 System information and warnings SYSTEM ERROR gt TURN POWER OFF CARD ERR REC WARNING BACKUP BATT EMPTY FAN STOP WIRELESS RF EOM BOS EOS CANNOT REC CANNOT PLAY COMM ERROR TEXT MEMO TEXT MEMO INVALID MARK ON OFF UPDATING USB DEVICE USB HOST THUMBNAIL OPEN 1394 INITIAL ERROR PROXY REC P2 amp SD PROXY REC P2 NE
123. SS 7 Adjust the LCD monitor brightness MODE LT BOX converter output signals S CROP 40 C U F R C U F 7 DETAIL ON For setting the detail function for the COLOR 7 Adjust the LCD monitor chroma level OFF down converter output signals ON OFF LEVEL The down converter output signals 0 contain detailed components that are clu F 7 ec during HD signa processing In this CONTRAST 7 Adjust the LCD monitor contrast setting these signals overlap the detailed components dedicated to the 0 down converter outputs Even if this setting is turned off it is C U F 7 impossible to turn off the detailed BACKLIGHT NORMAL Adjust the backlight components set during HD signal HIGH NORMAL Mode normally used _IclulFlr processing C UI F HIGH This is brighter than NORMAL HDTLLEVEL 100 For setting the horizontal detail SELF SHOOT NORMAL Select whether or not to change the correction level for the down converter MIRROR LCD monitor to mirror image _ 08 output signals NORMAL Do not change to mirror 3 image IclulFIR lclu el MIRROR Change to mirror image V DTL LEVEL 00 For setting the vertical detail correction ms level for the down converter output The _____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the 04 signals preset mode CjU F R 31 DTLCORING 00 For setting the noise elimination level of 01 the details c u F R 15 H DTL FREQ 1 For selecting the horizontal detail frequencies 3 1 2 5 MHz
124. STEM SETTING page and confirm that the settings in the 1394 IN CH item and the 1394 OUT CH item are set to AUTO 3 In case of input from the IEEE1394 interface set REC SIGNAL to 1394 The REC SIGNAL option must be selected from the lt SYSTEM MODE gt menu on the SYSTEM SETTING page Notes When no device is connected to the DVCPRO DV connector or no signal is being input to the connector the display window indicates 1394E 90 in the counter section Input the same signals to the IEEE1394 interface as the format set in SYSTEM MODE and REC MODE in the setting menu If a different format is used signals are not properly recorded on P2 cards When playback signals other than regularx1 normal speed playback signals have been input no guarantees are made for the video and sound recorded or for the video and sound of the EE system For information about the error codes see 1394 Error Codes page 136 The audio signal input will consist of an input signal from the IEEE1394 interface When the audio signal input from the IEEE1394 interface is 32 kHz 4CH 12 bits it is recorded as 48 kHz 4CH 16 bits on the P2 card It is not possible to use the GENLOCK IN connector to achieve synchronization with the external reference signal In SD mode the thumbnail button is prerssed thumbnail screen are output to the viewfinder and the MON OUT and VIDEO OUT connectors The signals which are output from the V
125. STOP button REC button on the handle or VTR button at the lens is pressed to start recording To use this function the menu option PRE REC MODE must be set to ON The storage duration of the internal memory can be set from the menu option PRE REC TIME PRE REC MODE and PRE REC TIME menu options can be found in the REC FUNCTION screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page The function of the menu option PRE REC MODE may be assigned to a desired user button by using any one of the menu options USER MAIN SW USER1 SW or USER2 SW These options can be found in the USER SW screen which is accessible from the CAM OPERATION page These are the options for PRE REC TIME 1 15 SEC for DVCPRO 25M or DV 1 8 SEC for DVCPRO HD or 50M Specify the duration for which data may be recorded before either the REC START STOP button REC button on the handle or VTR button at the lens is pressed REC start REC PAUSE Recording starts Recording pauses Real time video Real time sound Specified PRE REC duration Content on P2 card Previous clip aj B A C New clip l 32 Recording and Playback PRE RECORDING function 4 D Notes e P REC indication when the PRE REC MODE menu option is set to OFF After recording is stopped the P REC indication remains displayed until all video and sound are recorded on the P2 card even if the PRE REC MODE menu option is set to OFF For details of the P REC dis
126. Should video or audio recording fail due to a malfunction of this camera recorder or the P2 cards used we will not assume liability for such failure Data may not record or play back properly if you continue to operate the unit after stopping the cooling fan for an abnormal condition What to remember when throwing memory cards away or transferring them to others Formatting memory cards or deleting data using the functions of the unit or a computer will merely change the file management information it will not completely erase the data on the cards When throwing these cards away or transferring them to others either physically destroy them or use a data deletion program for computers commercially available to completely erase the data Users are responsible for managing the data on their memory cards Software information for this product i Customer advisory This product includes software licensed under the GNU General Public License GPL and GNU Lesser General Public License LGPL customers have the right to download modify and redistribute source code for this software Descriptions of the GPL and LGPL are stored on the installation CD included with this camera recorder See the folder named LDOC The description is the original written in English To download the relevant source code visit http panasonic biz sav Please note that we cannot answer any questions you may have about the content etc of any source code you
127. TART STOP Control for recording start stop UU START STOP START GND GND IRIS AUTO ON OFF of the forced iris servo SERVO ON 5V 0 5V SERVO OFF OPEN 5 IRIS CONT Control output for the lens iris F2 8 6 2 V F16 3 4 V CLOSE 2 5 V UNREG 12V 12V power supply for the lens Max 1 5 A 7 IRIS POSI Iris position signals 3 4 V F16 to 6 2 V F2 8 8 IRIS G MAX IRIS REMOTE LOCAL AUTO signals REMOTE 5V 0 5V LOCAL AUTO GND 9 EXT POSI ON OFF of the built in extender EXTENDER ON GND EXTENDER OFF OPEN 10 ZOOM POSI Zoom position signals 11 FOCUS POSI Focus position signal 12 SPARE Standby not used GPS GPS TXA Transmission data from the GPS unit to the camera GPS RXA Transmission data from the camera to the GPS unit GPS VBAT Backup power supply connector for the GPS unit DC 3 3 V REC START SW Control signals of REC start stop GPS VCC Power supply connector for the GPS unit DC 3 3 V GPS GND GND Maker part number HR10A 10R 12SC 71 Hirose Denki Maker part number HR10A 7R 6SC 73 Hirose Denki Maintenance and Inspections Maintenance and Inspections Maintenance 131 Unislot Interface 1 CH 1 SHIELD GND 2 CH 1 HOT Audio input from the wireless receiver HOT 3 CH 1 COLD Audio input from the wireless receiver COLD 4 GND GND 5 12V
128. Updated frame information Display Checking REC START STOP mark window information for the 6 digits at right Camera shooting mode Sequence No 60i 600 24P 24PA Oto 4 60P 608 In all other modes Fixed at F 30P 308 24P 248 24PA 24C 50i 502 50P 50A TCG switch 25P 25A CURSOR and SET buttons 1 For 1080i or 480i 576i Position the DISPLAY switch at UB Frame rate 24P Over 60i 2 3 2 Position the TCG switch at SET Starting field for the ae er updated frame When the left digit starts blinking you can change the Time code frame digit value oo of 02 03 04 05 06 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Image olAcfBo Be Bdfce CdDeDoDqAo Ac BoBe _ Co De Do DelAo Ae Bo Be Bo Ce CoDe DoDe 3 Use CURSOR buttons to set the user bits gt button Shifts the target blinking digit to the right lt button Shifts the target blinking digit to the left Sequence No A button Advances the blinking number by one digit ee ee V button Winds back the blinking number by one digit Updated frame information Lio 10 01 01 oo J 10 10 ee 01 00 10 10 01 01 00 A Position the TCG at F RUN or R RUN Frame rate 24PA Over 60i 2 3 3 2 5 Go to the lt TC UB gt screen from the MAIN Time code frame digit OPERATION page and set the menu o
129. WBP 59 94 Hz AJ VF15BP 59 94 Hz AJ VF20WBE 50 Hz and AJ VF15BE 50 Hz Use the VF TYPE menu options on the SYSTEM MODE screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page to adjust the appropriate settings for the viewfinder that will be used We recommend using a HD viewfinder when the camera recorder is used in HD mode or an SD viewfinder when it is used in SD mode Depending on the mode some types of video are unavailable as shown below the finder shows nothing on a black screen Mode viggo seen through HD viewfinder SD viewfinder viewfinder Video from camera O on AB Playback O ge Return video HD Y O e 1934 HD SDI input HD O onl Video from camera O O Playback O SD Return video VBS e O 1394 HD SDI input SD O Each viewfinder shows return signals and 1394 and SDI input signals in the recording formats assigned to the camera recorder 1 Down converted signals 2 When the OUTPUT SEL switch of the camera recorder is set to CAM a black screen is displayed 26 Parts and their Functions Viewfinder 13 14 117 Viewfinder optional accessory During recording or playback the viewfinder displays the video image in monochrome It also displays warnings messages zebra patterns markers safety zone and center markers etc ZEBRA zebra pattern switch This switch is used to display the zebra pattern in the viewfinder ON Zebra pattern displayed OFF No ze
130. Warning tone This tone will sound continuously until an operation is made after recording Warning ae 2 removed resulting in an error in the internal description memory of the camera recorder Recording playback Cannot be performed operation Turn off the power to the camera recorder If Countermeasures there is an error in a clip on the removed P2 card repair the clip oe I The inserted P2 cards are write protected description Recording playback Recording is disabled operation Disable the write protect or replace the P2 Countermeasures card Maintenance and Inspections Maintenance and Inspections Warning System 133 5 P2 Card Fully Recorded 7 Low Wireless Signal Reception Display window indication All 7 bar indicators for remaining MEDIA capacity start blinking Display window indication No display WARNING lamp This lamp will illuminate continuously until an operation is made after recording WARNING lamp Blinks 4 times per second During pause and recording Tally lamp This lamp will flash 4 times every second until an operation is made after recording Tally lamp Blinks 4 times per second while recording continues Viewfinder The END indicator blinks Warning tone This tone will sound continuously until an operation is made after recording Viewfinder The WIRELESS RF indicator lights up while reco
131. When the menu option SAVE LED is set to P2 CARD The lamp starts blinking when the P2 card remaining free space is getting low The menu option SAVE LED can be found in the lt VF INDICATOR2 gt which is accessible from the VF page 50 50 Mbps recording playback Lamp In using the SD viewfinder This lamp stays illuminated when the unit is set to the DVCPRO50 50 Mbps format and when playback is being performed in the DVCPRO50 format Note that the lamp is factory disabled For more information see the relevant section of the menu option 50M INDICATOR in VF DISPLAY page 154 LY Mode Check Screen Displays MODE CHECK button function The viewfinder can display a screen that allows you to check the settings and status of the unit Each press of the MODE CHECK button switches the screen as follows STATUS screen LED screen gt FUNCTION screen gt AUDIO screen No indication Each screen is displayed for about three seconds A press of the MODE CHECK button switches the current screen Whether or not to display each screen is specified through the lt MODE CHECK IND gt screen which is accessible from the VF page lt MODE CHECK IND gt STATUS ON LED ON FUNCTION ON AUDIO ON P ON IND ON Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder Screen Status Displays Adjustments and Settings for Recording 61 Selecting Viewfinder Display Information To selec
132. Whenever the playback order of clips is altered clips are sorted by shooting dates previous playback CTL count is disabled The first frame of the first clip is used as a reference value for recalculation and the new playback CTL count is displayed Example 7 First frame Current value Z y 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 03 00 00 Delete Clip 2 t val 4 Curren value Clip 1 Clip 3 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 02 00 00 Ne A 60 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting Time Data The playback order of clips is altered when either of the following occurs Clips are deleted copied or restored or the P2 card is formatted The thumbnail display is switched for more information see Switching the Thumbnail Display page 104 A P2 card is inserted or removed The reference value value of the first frame of the first clip is changed when either of the following occurs The power is turned on the first frame becomes 0 When the playback CTL count is reset the current playback position is set as 0 and the previous reference value becomes a negative value Example gt First frame Current value Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 03 00 00 Reset First frame 4 Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 00 03 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 Note If the RESET button is pressed while the playback CTL count is being displayed only the p
133. a Unit Pickup devices 2 3 inch CCD x 3 Image pickup scheme RGB 3CCD Total pixels 1370 H x 744 V Valid pixels 1280 H x 720 V Filter 1 3200K 2 5600K 1 8ND 3 5600K 4 5600K 1 64ND Quantizing 14 bit Horizontal drive frequency 74 1758 MHz 59 94 Hz 74 25 MHz 50 Hz Sampling frequencies 74 1758 MHz 59 94 Hz 74 25 MHz 50 Hz Digital signal processing 74 1758 MHz 59 94 Hz 74 25 MHz 50 Hz Programmable gain 3 dB 0 dB 3 dB 6 dB 9 dB 12 dB 15 dB 18 dB 21 dB 24 dB 27 dB or 30 dB Digital Super Gain DS GAIN Selectable from 6 dB 10 dB 12 dB 15 dB or 20 dB LINE MIX GAIN 6 dB selectable between on and off Super Gain S GAIN Selectable from 30 dB 36 dB 42 dB or 48 dB Operating humidity 10 to maximum 85 relative humidity Maximum continuous operation Approximately 120 minutes using an Anton Bauer DIONIC90 battery Dimensions W x H x D 137 mm x 209 mm x 318mm 5 3 16 inches x 8 1 2 inches x 12 1 2 inches excluding handle and wireless option cover Approx 4 5 kg 9 9 Ib main unit only excluding VF mount Weight Shutter speeds 1 60 50 Hz 1 100 59 94 Hz 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 HALF Synchro scan shutter 1 60 3 to 1 249 8 1080 59 94i 720 59 94P 480 59 94i 1 30 2 to 1 249 8 1080 29 97P 720 29 97P 480 29 97P 1 24 1 to 1 249 8 1080 23 98P A 720 23 98P 480 23 98P A 1 50 2 to 1 209 5 1080 50i 720 50P 576 50i 1 2
134. a recorder cannot play back clips where the system mode differs If this is the case set the system mode of camera recorder to the format of the desired clip before playing it back When a P2 card has been just removed or inserted or when the power has been just turned on for playback it may take some time for camera recorder to read clip information If this is the case the viewfinder displays UPDATING If data is played back when the P2 card is being recognized the message CANNOT PLAY will be displayed f a P2 card is inserted while another P2 card is being played back the clips on the inserted P2 card will not be played back A P2 card inserted during playback will be recognised after playback ends if you perform variable speed playback on a clip split across more than one P2 card sound may disappear for a moment This is not a fault Text Memo Function Text memos are time coded thumbnails added to any video point when a clip is being recorded or played back The Text Memo button adds text memo information at the appropriate point You can edit added text memos using the P2 viewer Through a thumbnail display you can choose and play back the text memo point or copy any portion For more information see Text Memo page 105 Notes One clip can have up to 100 text memos Text memos can also be recorded when the LCD monitor is in thumbnail mode In this case a text memo is added to the beg
135. alue at the start of the recording START UB The user bit value at the start of the recording DATE The date of the recording TIME The time at the start of the recording DURATION The time length of the clip V FORMAT The recording format for the clip FRAME RATE The frame rate for the playback REC RATE The recording frame rate is displayed This is indicated on the clip that data is recorded in a special way using the camera recorder Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Clip Meta Data Displays more detailed data about the clip Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer and press the SET button to check the detailed content The underlined items are automatically set during shooting For more information on displayed metadata see Setting of Clip Meta Data page 109 P P2 Card Status Display Settings Select PROPERTY gt CARD STATUS from the thumbnail menu to set the desired indication mode remaining free space or used memory capacity for the P2 card status display 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor 2 Press the MENU button and select PROPERTY gt PROPERTY SETUP gt P2 CARD CAP from the thumbnail menu The following screen appears Select the P2 card status display settings from the P2 CARD CAP menu option THUMBNAIL gt OPERATION CLIP PROPERTY CARD STATUS DEVICES 182 00 00 45 12 00 09 44 03 00 00 00 00 REMAIN Show remaining
136. amera Menu To decrease the value Turn the JOG dial button anti clockwise as seen from the front of the camera Each turn of the dial switches the value by one step A quick turn changes the value rapidly a slow turn makes a fine adjustment To turn an option on or off To select ON turn the JOG dial button clockwise as seen from the front of the camera To select OFF turn the JOG dial button anti clockwise as seen from the front of the camera To return the changed set value to the previous one Press the shot mark menu cancel button to display the message PUSH CANCEL BACK TO PREV Press the shot mark menu cancel button again to return the set value to the value before the change Note The following menu items cannot be cancelled using the shot mark menu cancel button Pages on the USER MENU SELECT screen Pages on the FILE screen CAMERA ID USER SW GAIN Part of the WHITE BALANCE MODE pages BATTERY SETTING1 2 UMID SET INFO Press the JOG dial button The value stops blinking and is accepted To change the settings for other options on the same page repeat Steps 4 6 When the settings are finalised press the MENU button This terminates the menu option setting mode and returns the unit to normal operation mode Menu Menu Configuration 139 E Selecting Options for USER MENU Go to the USER MENU SELECT page from MAIN MENU Then open relevant options menu screens to
137. amp Blinks 4 times per second WARNING lamp Lights up Tally lamp Blinks 4 times per second Tally lamp Blinks once per second Viewfinder The SYSTEM ERROR indication and the error code light up Warning tone Beeps continuously Warning An error in the reference signal or the description communication Recording playback The operation stops operation Countermeasures Please confirm Error Codes page 136 and consult your distributor 2 Card removal error Viewfinder The BATT LED lights up Warning tone Beeps continuously arming The battery has run out description Recording playback The operation stops operation Countermeasures Replace the battery 4 Write protect Display window indication Error code E 30 blinks Display window indication All 7 bar indicators for remaining MEDIA capacity start blinking WARNING lamp Blinks 4 times per second Tally lamp Blinks 4 times per second WARNING lamp This lamp will illuminate continuously until an operation is made after recording Viewfinder The TURN POWER OFF indicator lights up Tally lamp This lamp will flash 4 times every second until an operation is made after recording Warning tone Continues to beep Viewfinder The WP indicator lights up The P2 card being accessed has been
138. an be added to a clip thumbnail to distinguish this clip from the others 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the clip to which you want to attach a shot mark 3 Press the Shot Mark button 4 A shot mark will be attached to the clip thumbnail under the pointer To delete a shot mark reposition the pointer over the clip and press the Shot Mark button Notes A shot mark can be attached during recording Please refer to Shot Mark Function page 35 for more information When adding a shot mark to or deleting the shot mark from a clip recorded across multiple P2 cards do this with all these P2 cards inserted into P2 card slots Text Memo Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails During recording or playback you can add text memos to clips Text memos can be used to play back clips at some point or break clips into chunks and copy the necessary portions E Adding a text memo Text memos can be added in one of the following ways Press the TEXT MEMO button during recording or playback of a clip A text memo is added to the position where the button is pressed Press the TEXT MEMO button when the thumbnail screen is displayed A text memo is added to the beginning of the clip Note One clip can have up to 100 text and voice memos in combination Note that camera recorder is not capable of adding or showing voi
139. anged 8 Press the HOLD button to display a time zone time difference between local time and Greenwich Mean Time in the display window 9 Position the TCG switch at SET 10 Use the A and V buttons to set the desired hours and minutes ahead of no sign or behind sign the Greenwich Mean Time Example If the local time is five hours behind Greenwich Mean Time set the time zone to 5 00 The time zone is always recorded together with the date and time as metadata See the table at right to set the time zone according to your local time 1 1 Position the TCG switch at F RUN or R RUN to accept the time zone Notes When using the camera recorder for the first time be sure to perform this setting beforehand Do not change the setting during use of the camera recorder When the TCG switch is positioned at SET thumbnails cannot be manipulated Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting Time Data Time difference Time difference Area Area 00 00 Greenwich 12 00 Kwajalein 00 30 11 30 01 00 Central Europe 11 00 Midway Island 01 30 10 30 02 00 Eastern Europe 10 00 Hawaii 02 30 09 30 Marquesas Islands 03 00 Moscow 09 00 Alaska 03 30 Tehran 08 30 04 00 Abu Dhabi 08 00 Los Angeles 04 30 Kabul 07 30 05 00 Islamabad 07 00 Denver 05 30 Bo
140. ard disc drive Select YES to start writing When the data is being written a progress bar is displayed To discontinue writing press the SET button and select YES instead of cancellation confirmation Note To disable verification at the time of writing select HDD SETUP from the thumbnail menu and set the option VERIFY to OFF This speeds up writing without verifying data writing When the writing is completed the message COPY COMPLETED is displayed Notes For a Type S hard disc drive data can be written on a card basis The data on up to 15 P2 cards can be stored on the hard disc drive The data set on each P2 card is recognized as a separate drive by the PC if data on a P2 card that contains a defective clip must be written to a hard disc drive then we recommend fixing that clip before copying the data When the process is discontinued during verification the data on the P2 card has been written to the hard disc drive Connection with external device Connection with external device Connection with external devices using the USB 2 0 port 123 Writing data back to P2 cards You can select clips on the hard disc drive to be written back to P2 cards 1 Switch the mode to USB HOST For more information see Switching to the USB HOST mode page 121 Connect a hard disc drive via USB Insert the target P2 card in a slot WG RN Press the MENU button and select HDD gt EXPLORE fr
141. ard has just been inserted or the power has been just turned on you can start recording using the internal memory of camera recorder In this case recording cannot be stopped until the P2 card is recognised If the inserted card is not recognized as a recordable P2 card the record in internal memory is instantly discarded and the message CANNOT REC message is displayed on the viewfinder Press the MODE CHECK button to check P2 card status displayed in viewfinder 4 To use the electronic shutter set the shutter speed and operation mode For more information see Setting the Electronic Shutter page 42 5 Press either the REC START STOP button REC button on the handle or VTR button at the lens to start a recording During recording the REC lamp in the viewfinder stays illuminated 6 To stop recording press either the REC START STOP button REC button on the handle or VTR button at the lens The REC lamp in the viewfinder goes out Operation Buttons During recording all operation buttons REW FF PLAY PAUSE STOP are disabled REC START STOP button Mode check button Recording and Playback Recording and Playback Normal Recording 31 PRE RECORDING function The internal memory of your unit is capable of storing several seconds of video and sound data coming from the camera This capability can be used to record video and sound several seconds before either the REC START
142. ata Saved Range R PHASE 63 For performing the hue correction for red 00 s c u F R 63 R Mg PHASE 63 For performing the hue correction between red and magenta 00 s c u F R 63 Mg PHASE 63 For performing the hue correction for magenta 00 g s c u F R 63 Mg B PHASE 63 For performing the hue correction between magenta and blue 00 s c u F R 63 B PHASE 63 For performing the hue correction for blue 00 S cC U F R 63 B Cy PHASE 63 For performing the hue correction between blue and cyan 00 s c u F R 63 Cy PHASE l 63 For performing the hue correction for cyan 00 y s c u F R 63 Cy G PHASE 63 For performing the hue correction between cyan and green 00 y g s c u F R 63 G PHASE 63 For performing the hue correction for reen 00 g s c u F R 63 G YI PHASE 63 For performing the hue correction between green and yellow 00 s c u F R 63 YI PHASE 63 For performing the hue correction for ellow 00 yi s c u F R 63 YI R PHASE l 63 For performing the hue correction between yellow and red 00 s clu F R 63 mCOLOR ON For switching ON OFF of the 12 axis CORRECT OFF independent color correction of the position selected with the GAIN switch s c u F R L M H The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode 148 Menu Menu Description Tables Items Adjustable Reiharke Data Saved Range MMASTER 3dB Select the master gain from 3 0 3 6
143. ated in with that card s remaining free minutes space indicated in minutes Example 20 40 Example Jj 8min LOOP REC mode Indicated as LOOP The minimum guaranteed recording time is indicated in minutes Example 7min The menu option P2CARD REMAIN can be found in the lt VF INDICATOR2 gt screen which is accessible from the VF page Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder Screen Status Displays Adjustments and Settings for Recording 67 Indications Available in the Viewfinder Screen Selectable between on and off through menu options Provided when the appropriate status is encountered Provided during MODE CHECK Selectable Provided during playback System mode Camera mode REC mode Shutter speed mode P2 card remaining free space OJOJOJOJO P A Pl e yia P2 card remaining free space MODE CHECK Camera recorder REC indication O Battery type Battery remaining level voltage 10 MODE CHECK indication area 11 Camera warning and report area 12 User button functions 13 System information and warnings 14 Time code indication OJO 15 D ZOOM 16 Extender 17 Color temperature 18 Filter position 19 Dynamic range stretcher mode 20 WHITE BAL switch position 21 Stored gain indication 22 Gain value 23 L
144. ation about how to input a user value see Inputting a user value page 50 The recorded user value is retained even if the power is turned off TIME The time kept by the built in clock is recorded DATE The hour digits for date and time kept by the built in clock are recorded EXT UB MODE only The user bits value input through the TC IN connector is recorded When the menu option REC SIGNAL is set to 1394 then the value is slaved to the user bits value from the DVCPRO DV connector The included user s value will also be this input value TCG The time code value is recorded FRM RATE The frame rate information for camera shooting is recorded For more information see Frame rate infor mation recorded in user bits page 50 REGEN The user bits last recorded on the current target P2 card is read and recorded as is USER EXT VITC UB MODE only The included user s value is recorded as the user bits for the VIDEO AUX area It is the same value as the user bits indicated when the option UB MODE is set to USER or EXT Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting Time Data Adjustments and Settings for Recording 49 Inputting a user value Frame rate information The frame rate and video pull down menu are linked to the time code and user bits as follows Kk 104 24 Bx L HOLD switch ae DISPLAY switch Fixed val L media management information xec vaye
145. available P2 cards except for the card with the largest remaining free space Example If three P2 cards are available with remaining space of eight minutes five minutes and two minutes respectively then the minimum guaranteed recording time is seven minutes During recording of IEEE1394 input LOOP REC is not available Terminating the Loop Recording Mode You can terminate the loop recording mode by either Turning off the POWER switch of camera recorder or Setting the menu option LOOP REC MODE to OFF Recording Review Function When recording is paused pressing the RET button automatically locates the last two seconds of video just recorded and the viewfinder provides video playback After playback the camera recorder is again ready to start recording The picture location playback duration can be increased to up to 10 seconds by continuously pressing the RET button For short clips however when the start of a clip is located continuously pressing the RET button does not play back any clips before that clip The function of the RET button may be assigned to a desired user button by using one of the menu options USER MAIN SW USER1 SW or USER2 SW These options can be found in the lt USER SW gt screen on the CAM OPERATION page When recording is paused pressing the PLAY PAUSE button plays back the last recorded clip from the beginning After completion of playback the camera recorder enters the stoppe
146. ble Each button can be assigned the on off function for any frequently used feature selected from among the many features of the unit such as digital zooming and super gain Refer to page 44 Dimensions drawing Unit mm inch 137 5 3 g 318 12 1 5 Tm Ko c 0 270 5 10 58 A TENSE A IA KEPIN Ko I S4 4 Kore QIN General Dimensions drawing 11 System Configuration Unislot wireless Note microphone receiver All of the devices and accessories other than the unit Sennheiser EK3041 Video encoder card which are shown in this system configuration are option AJ YAX800G ally available To use these devices and accessories refer to the respective operation manuals Stereo microphone AJ MC900G Remote control cable Remote control unit AJ C10050G AJ RC10G Microphone holder AJ MH800G DIONIC90 160 HYTRON50 100 140 2 type HD Viewfinder AJ HVF21G PROPAC14 TRIMPAC14 Viewfinder AJ VF15B AJ VF20WB V mount type ENDURA7 10 Battery plate BP GL65 95 NP 1 type NP L7 Battery case Memory Card External DC Camera Recorder power supply AJ HPX2000P Lens Bayonet type Fujinon Canon GPS unit AJ GPS900G Tripod adapter SHAN TM700 Rain cover SHAN RC700 HD SD SDI input board AJ YA350G Soft carrying case A
147. bra pattern displayed TALLY switch Used to control the 7 front tally lamp HIGH Front tally lamp brightly illuminated OFF Front tally lamp stays off LOW Front tally lamp dimly illuminated PEAKING control Used to adjust the outlines of the video image in the viewfinder for easier focusing This does not affect the signal output from the camera CONTRAST control Used to adjust the contrast of the video image in the viewfinder This does not affect the signal output from the camera BRIGHT control Used to adjust the brightness of the video image in the viewfinder This does not affect the signal output from the camera Front tally lamp This lamp is activated when the 3 TALLY switch is positioned at HIGH or LOW and stays on during recording It also blinks in synchronisation with the REC lamp in the viewfinder and provides alerts Use the TALLY switch to change the intensity of the lamp to HIGH or LOW Back tally lamp This lamp stays illuminated during shooting It also blinks in synchronisation with the REC lamp in the viewfinder and provides alerts When the lever is positioned at OFF the back tally lamp is hidden 10 11 Connecting plug 12 Locking ring 13 Microphone holder 14 Viewfinder stopper lt tr E gt e Eyepiece Note Do not leave the eyepiece aimed at the sun Doing so may damage the internal components Diopter adjustment ring Use this
148. button Turn the JOG dial button clockwise or anti clockwise to change the value The iris indication section of the viewfinder screen displays or When the desired value is displayed stop C TEMP turning the JOG dial button Then press the dial button to accept that value Note that once the mode is cancelled or the power is turned off the original reference value will be used again Iris opens up by 0 5 Iris opens up by 1 Iris closes down by 0 5 Iris closes down by 1 No indication The reference value is used S BLK Super Black function assigned This function lowers the black level to the pedestal level or below B GAMMA The BLACK gamma function is allocated This function highlights the black gradations Regardless of the value set in the BLACK GAMMA item on the menu lt LOW SETTING gt screen lt MID SETTING gt screen and lt HIGH SETTING gt screen on the PAINT page the BLACK GAMMA is set to 3 When the digital zoom function is active the view angle expands by double triple or 4 times horizontally and vertically When the digital zoom function is turned on the DTL function is disabled Auto tracking white balance function assigned Function of indicating the brightness level of the center marker assigned The function of the dynamic range stretcher is allocated The function is allocated to compress the video level with high bri
149. capability you can press that user button to switch between the normal and USB HOST modes For information about how to assign functions to the user buttons see Assigning Functions to USER MAIN USER1 and USER2 Buttons page 44 2 Press the THUMBNAIL button to go to the thumbnail screen Check to see that the screen indicates USB HOST in the lower right corner When a hard disc drive is connected the HDD indication in the upper right corner stays illuminated If it is illuminated in red then an unusable hard disc drive is connected If this is the case check the type of drive For information about the HDD indication see Thumbnail Screen page 101 E Using the USB host mode 92 a E a 00 01 28 07 00 00 55 11 06 107 00 02 08 07 Las J een A kua 00 03 51 04 00 04 48 26 00 06 47 11 D 00 02 33 26 D a p 00 00 45 12 E I 00 09 44 03 00 00 00 00 USB HOST display Note In USB HOST mode clips on P2 cards can be displayed but video from the camera or an external device cannot be recorded Clips written to a hard disc must be written back to a P2 card before it can be played back For information about how to write clips back to P2 cards see Writing data back to P2 cards page 124 Usable hard disc drives Hard disc drives connectable via USB 2 0 P2 STORE AJ PCSO60G Note While the USB HOST mode supports USB bus power some hard disc drives may not activate If
150. ce memos Text Memo Button Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Shot Mark 105 E Playing back a clip at the position where a text memo is recorded 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor 2 Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select THUMBNAIL TEXT MEMO CLIPS from the thumbnail menu The clip thumbnails with text memos attached are displayed in the upper section of the LCD monitor The lower section of the LCD monitor shows information about the text memo on the clip selected by the pointer 02 los 4 i 2 a itl aT 00 00 55 11 00 06 47 11 00 00 00 00 TEXT MEMO CLIP 07 T01 04 Thumbnail Shows the still image that the Display text memo is related to Shows the total number of text memos attached to the clip B Deleting a text memo 3 Move the pointer over the clip that contains the desired text memo to playback and press the SET button The pointer moves to the lower part of the LCD monitor TEXT MEMO 2 a p z wi pil Ja T TI thie T 00 00 55 11 00 08 26 00 06 47 11 00 00 00 00 TEXT MEMO WH T02 CLIP 07 T01 04 The pointer moves down With the pointer located in the lower part move the pointer to the desired time stamp number using the cursor right and left buttons lt I gt Then press the PLAY button Playback will start from the time code position of the text memo where the pointer is located If the STOP button
151. cessary aaa DO RR To be connected if necessary 1 I DICT i 4 1C6 ABISGIGEG4 ik l N o occ geneenedl 70S EIGEIOC IG l Settings of the TC VIDEO SYNCRO item 3 AJ o 1st unit Settings of the TC VIDEO SYNCRO POP TC IN Lameeee GENLOCK IN A device that synchronizes with the TC IN input and capable to record without delay DAT etc Settings of the TC fC VIDEO SYNCRO eR item 2 A device that synchronizes with the TC IN input and capable to record without delay such as DAT or a camera recorder 56 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting Time Data To externally lock the time code Follow the steps below 1 Turn on the POWER switch 2 Position the TCG switch at F RUN 3 Position the DISPLAY switch at TC 4 Set the menu option GENLOCK to EXT This option can be found in the lt GENLOCKs gt screen which is accessible from the SYSTEM SETTING page Supply a phase relationship reference time code that conforms to the time code requirements and reference video signals to the TC IN and GENLOCK IN connectors respectively Now the built in time code generator is locked with the reference time code From about 10 seconds after locking the time code generator stays locked even if the supply of external reference time code is discontinued Notes When the time
152. ctronic Equipment private households This symbol on the products and or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general household waste For proper treatment recovery and recycling please take these products to designated collection points where they will be accepted on a free of charge basis Alternatively in some countries you may be able to return your products to your local retailer upon the purchase of an equivalent new product Disposing of this product correctly will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling Please contact your local authority for further details of your nearest designated collection point Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste in accordance with national legislation For business users in the European Union If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment please contact your dealer or supplier for further information Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union This symbol is only valid in the European Union If you wish to discard this product please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal Panasonic Panasonic Broadcast amp Television Systems Company Unit Company of Panasonic Corporation of North America
153. d together with the remaining space For more information see P2 Card Remaining Free Space capacity Indication page 67 6 P2 card remaining EJ min The number of the P2 card slot that contains the target card and the free space remaining free space when MODE CHECK is being performed are when MODE CHECK indicated In LOOP REC mode the minimum guaranteed recording time is is being performed indicated This indication also appears when the target P2 card has been switched with a user button The minimum guaranteed recording time refers to the sum at the time loop recording is stopped of the remaining free space of available P2 cards except for the card with the largest remaining free space Example If three P2 cards are available with remaining space of eight minutes five minutes and two minutes respectively then the minimum guaranteed recording time is seven minutes 7 Camera recorder REC When an external device is controlled through the 1394 connection when REC indication the 1394 option is set to BOTH the recording status of the camera recorder is displayed using characters The indication stays illuminated during recording This is displayed when the menu option REC TALLY of the OPTION MODE is set to CHAR This can also be displayed during the recording using the unit alone This is displayed when the menu option REC STATUS of the VF INDICATOR2 is set to ON 8 Battery type PRO14 AC_ADPT Battery typ
154. d state ie Recording starts Recording pauses The PLAY button plays back the clip from the beginning The RET button puts the camera recorder into REC REVIEW mode Ne Notes Set the menu option RET SW found on the SW MODE page for CAM OPERATION to R REVIEW When the OUTPUT SEL switch on the side panel is positioned at MEM the video for REC REVIEW is output from the video output connectors VIDEO OUT and MON OUT connectors and also to the viewfinder Note that when a backup device is connected to back up the video the pictures for REC REVIEW are backed up Recording and Playback Recording and Playback Loop Recording 33 Normal and Variable Speed Playback The PLAY PAUSE button provides monochrome playback through the viewfinder and color playback on the LCD monitor A color video monitor connected to the VIDEO OUT or MON OUT connector of camera recorder also provides color playback The VIDEO OUT connector outputs an SDI playback to view the playback the OUTPUT SEL switch on the side panel must be positioned to MEM Variable speed playback The FF and REW buttons provide 32x and 4x fast playbacks and fast reverse playbacks When playback is paused the FF button locates the beginning of the next clip while maintaining the pause mode When playback is paused the REW button locates the beginning of the current clip while maintaining the pause mode Notes The camer
155. de TC OUT connector BNC When you inter lock the time code of camera recorder with that of an external device this must be connected with the time code input TC IN connector of the external device Note The time code must be input in the same format as the system mode of the camera recorder HOLD button Pressing this button freezes the time data indication on the counter Note that time code generation continues Pressing the button again reactivates the counter This function is used to ascertain the time code or CTL count of a particular recorded scene RESET button This button resets the time data CTL on the counter to 00 00 00 00 If this button is pressed when with the 7 TCG switch positioned at SET time code and user bits data are reset to 0 and real time data is reset to the initial value 22 Parts and their Functions Time Code Section DISPLAY counter display selector switch Indications of the time code CTL and user bits on the counter of the display window depend on the positions of this switch and the 7 TCG switch Pressing the 4 HOLD button also displays Date Time Time Zone UB User bits TIME DATE or Time zone indicated TC Time code indicated CTL CTL indicated TCG time code selector switch This switch is used to specify the stepping mode for the built in time code generator F RUN Select this position to continuously advance the time code independently of th
156. dications see Warning System page 133 f a P2 card is removed while being accessed clips on it may become irregular Check the clips and restore them if required For more information about how to restore clips see Restoring Clips page 107 f a P2 card being formatted is removed it may be not be formatted properly In this case the viewfinder displays TURN POWER OFP If this message appears turn off the power then restart camera recorder to reformat the card if a P2 card is inserted while another P2 card is being played back the inserted P2 card is not recognised and the P2 CARD ACCESS LED for that card does not come on Card recognition starts when the playback ends lt For Your Information gt The P2 CARD ACCESS LEDs may be set to stay off using the menu option ACCESS LED This option can be found on the lt OPTION MODE gt screen which is accessible from the SYSTEM SETTING page To Prevent Accidental Erasure of P2 Card Content To prevent the content of a P2 card being accidentally erased position the write protect switch on the P2 card at Protect Note Write protect switchover can be performed while the card is being accessed during recording or playback but does not take effect until access to the card ceases Protect E Write protect switch P2 CARD ACCESS LED and status of P2 cards P2 CARD MODE CHECK ACCESS LED indication S
157. ding AJ HPX2000 can retain a certain amount of previously recorded material by continuously loop recording data into a specified recording area PRE RECORDING function In standby status AJ HPX2000 always stores video and sound input to the camera for up to 8 seconds For 1080i 720P HD This means that the PRE RECORDING function when turned on records the video and sound for a preceding duration preset by the user This feature recovers critical moments that you might have missed For DVCPRO and DV video and sound can be recorded for up to 15 seconds Proxy recording when AJ YAX800G attached By installing the optional video encoder card AJ YAX800G MPEG4 format video and real time metadata such as time code data can be recorded simultaneously on the P2 card and the SD memory card together with the video and sound recorded by the camera This function is useful for confirmation of editing of clips For more information about the approximate duration for proxy recording see Approximate Proxy Recording Time optional on SD memory cards page 9 Please also see lt Cautions in using SD memory cards gt page 20 Data protection Data on P2 cards will not be lost due to overwriting unless the files are deleted or the cards are initialised Recordings are written only to free space General Features of Recorder player unit E HD Format DVCPRO HD SD Format User switchable Between DVCPRO50 DVCPRO and DV Reco
158. dling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Caution regarding laser beams The CCD may be damaged if it is subjected to light from a laser beam When using the camera recorder in locations where laser irradiation equipment is used be careful not to allow the laser beam to shine directly on the lens Attention Attentie Batteries are used for the main power source and memory back up in the product At the end of their useful life you should not throw them away Instead hand them in as small chemical waste Voor de primaire voeding en het reservegeheugen van het apparaat wordt gebruikgemaakt van een batterij Wanneer de batterij is uitgeput mag u deze niet gewoon weggooien maar dient u deze als klein chemisch afval weg te doen To remove the battery Verwijderen van de batterij Main Power Battery Ni Cd Battery Batterij Voor Primaire Voeding Nikkelcadmiumbatterij Anton Bauer Battery Anton Bauer Batterij f a battery made by any other manufacturer is to be used check the Operating Instructions accompanying the battery in geval u een batterij van een anden fabrikant zou gebruiken gelieve dan eerst zorgvuldig de gebruiksaanwijzing van deze batterij te lezen Unlocking lever Ontgrendelingshefboom PLEASE NOTE When preparing to record important images always shoot some advance test footage to verify that both pictures and sound are being recorded normally
159. ds of lighting tend to flicker use a light source which is free from flicker such as sunlight or a halogen lamp After correction Before correction et 4 l H PARA 1 1 When the lens has an extender or ratio converter repeat steps 7 9 to enable the extender or ratio converter function The camera recorder stores as one lens file data item three different correction values for the following a lens with an extender a lens with a ratio converter and a lens with neither of them Preparation Mounting the lens and Performing the Flange Back and White Shading Adjustments T Preparation 93 When making the white shading correction make the adjustment while observing the R G and B waveforms in the horizontal and vertical directions with the waveform monitor This now completes the white shading adjustments The adjustment values are now stored in the non volatile memory so that even when the unit s power is turned off there will be no further need to perform the white shading adjustment 94 Preparation Mounting the lens and Performing the Flange Back and White Shading Adjustments Preparing for Audio Input Take the following steps to prepare the camera for connecting audio input devices E When Using the Front Microphone AJ HPX2000 can be equipped with the AJ MC900G stereo microphone kit an extra cost option 3 Connect the microphone cable to the MIC IN jack on the camera 1 Open
160. e button increases shutter speed Auto Knee function If you shoot a PC monitor for example you should Usually when you adjust levels to shoot people or scenery adjust shutter speed so that the horizontal bars in the against a strongly lit background the background will be totally f whited out with buildings and other objects blurred In this case viewfinder will produce less noise the auto knee function reproduces the background clearly This function is effective when 11 REC START STOP button The subject is a person positioned in the shade under a clear Pressing this button starts recording pressing again sky eThe subject is a person inside a car or building and you also stops recording want to capture the background visible through a window This button has the same function as the 24 REC The subject is a high contrast scene button on the handle and the VTR button at the lens 7 WHITE BAL white balance memory selector 12 SHOT MARK Menu cancel button switch Pressing this button while recording adds a shot mark Used to select the white balance adjustment method to the thumbnail of that clip This button also adds a f shot mark to any thumbnail selected on the LCD PRST Use this when you have no time to adjust the monitor y white balance t S For more information on shot marks see Shot Mark The value for the white balance is factory set Function page 35 to 3200 K This button cancels the revised set value when the
161. e O45 clu F R Disable clu F R i00 36 dB Ey Select whether or not to enable 36dB for A IRIS PEAK 000 Determine the peak to standard ratio for SUPER GAIN AVE the auto iris x Enable 030 A larger value sets the auto iris to Ic U FIR e Disable 100 respond to the peak in the IRIS 42 dB Pk Select whether or not to enable 42dB for detection Window while a smaile value 3 SUPER GAIN sets it to respond to the average value in e Enable Iclule R the window Iclule r e Disable A IRIS NORM1 Select the auto iris detection window 28 dB x Select whether or noi to enable 48dB for WINDOW NORM2 NORM1 The window closer to the center FE SUPER GAIN CENTR of the screen i NORM2 The window closer to bottom of x Enable e Disable the screen C U F R l CENTR The spot window in the center of DS GAIN Pk Select whether or not to enable 6 dB 7 for Iclule R the screen eet k DS GAIN S IRIS LEVEL 000 Set the target value for the super iris x Enable Backlight tion functi SclulrR e Disable so Backlight correction function 10dB 1 x Select whether or not to enable 10 dB 1 clulF R 100 i iad a IRIS GAIN CAM Select which unit controls IRIS GAIN oe Disable LENS Note C U F R i l Lenses with an extender such as x2 12dBt Select whether or not to enable 12 dB 1 x0 8 sold before FUJINON DIGI for DS GAIN POWER perform IRIS compensation Enable while enabling the extender Therefore if Ic UIFIR e Disable this se
162. e POS user box center 00 C U FIR SAFETY 80 For setting the size of the safety marker C U F R 50 AREA It is possible to set the size by units of 90 am i 1 with a fixed ratio between of width Ic U FIR 400 and height FRAME MARKON Set the frame marker to ON or OFF OFF CIU FIR FRAME SIG 4 3 Set the frame marker 13 9 Only enabled when REC MODE is set to 14 9 16 9 IC U F RIVISTA The VISTA ratio is 16 8 65 Set the level outside the frame marker FRAME LVL 0 0 Equivalent to signal OFF Blanking 15 status 15 Same brightness as center area This setting however is disabled if the FRAME SIG is set to VISTA Note When SYSTEM MODE is set to either 1080 59 94i 1080 50i 720 59 94P or 720 50P in HD mode the safety zone marker the safety zone area and the frame marker are displayed on the LCD monitor or the SD viewfinder if LT BOX or S CROP is selected in DOWNCON MODE The user box can be displayed in any position as a boxtype cursor Note When SYSTEM MODE item is set to either 1080 59 94i 1080 50i 720 59 94P or 720 50P in HD mode the user box is not displayed on the LCD monitor or the SD viewfinder if LT BOX or S CROP is selected in DOWNCON MODE The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode f
163. e latest clip Software must be used under the condition where the camera recorder thumbnail screen is closed The application software may not be able to apply control when the thumbnail screen is open During special playback video and audio signals which have not been processed as the output signals of the IEEE1394 interface will be output When these video and audio signals are monitored on another device they may be at variance from the video and audio signals which are played back by camera recorder in the case when the output format is either DV or DVCPRO 25M the audio channel signal selected from the 1394 AUDIO OUT option of the setup menu will be output from the IEEE1394 interface Connection with external device Connection with external device Connection through the DVCPRO DV connector 1 1 9 Connection with external devices using the USB 2 0 port I Connection with a PC in the USB DEVICE mode By connecting AJ HPX2000 with an external PC using USB 2 0 the P2 card connected to AJ HPX2000 can be used as a mass storage device Procedures for establishing a connection with a PC 1 Connect the USB cable to the USB 2 0 port Notes The USB 2 0 cable is not included with the camera recorder Please use a commercially available USB 2 0 cable shield with a ferrite core The length of the USB cable shall be not exceed 3 meters Using a USB cable whose length is greater than 3 meters might result in
164. e selected through a menu option AC_ADPT indicates when when MODE CHECK an external DC power supply has been input is being performed 9 Battery remaining xx xx V Battery remaining level in tenths of a volt level voltage KK KY Digital battery remaining level as a percentage EMP Digital battery empty MAX Digital battery fully charged Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder Screen Status Displays Adjustments and Settings for Recording 63 Information Item Indication Status 10 MODE CHECK LOW MID HIGH Value set for the master gain Indication Area 3 to 30 Example LOW 0 STATUS S GAIN 30 36 42 48 Gain value to which S GAIN and DS GAIN are assigned Master gain DS GAIN 67 107 12T USER SW GAIN 15 1 20 1 Cause of LED GAIN 0 dB Gain status illumination displayed GAIN 3 dB Gain status full screen DS GAIN DS GAIN value Indications selected LINE MIX LINE MIX status ON or OFF SHUTTER Shutter status eo ine menu odon WHITE PRE White balance status EXTENDER Extender status EX2 or OFF N I B GAMMA BLACK GAMMA status ON or OFF Indications which may MATRIX MATRIX status A B or OFF activate the ILED are COLOR COR Color correction status ON or OFF marked with E FILTER Filter status ATW ATW status ON or OFF FUNCTION OUTPUT MEM CAM OFF Position of OUTPUT SEL switch VIDEO OUT TYPE HD SDI SD SDI VBS Setting for menu option VIDEO OUT switch CHAR ON OFF
165. e then all part after the selected text memo is copied If more than one text memo is selected then the appropriate portions are copied 5 When the clip is being copied the camera recorder indicates the progress of the copy process and cancellation status To discontinue the copy process press the SET button Then a YES NO confirmation screen is displayed Use the cursor buttons and SET button to select YES Deleting Clips 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the clip you want to delete Press the SET button to select the clip 3 Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select OPERATION DELETE from the thumbnail menu 4 The following screen appears Use the cursor buttons and the SET button to select YES 2 THUMBNAIL gt DELETE OPERATION FORMAT PROPERTY Ci META DATA REPAIR CLIP RE CONNECTI COPY DEVICE SETUP EXIT DELETE 2 CLIPS EXIT 00 00 00 00 Dur 00 00 50 11 00 09 44 03 480 60i 00 00 45 12 5 The clip is deleted All selected clips in blue green frames are deleted by this operation Note Pressing the SET button stops the deletion operation in the middle Restoring Clips Restores clips that are defective as a result of sudden powering down during recording or removal of the P2 card being accessed Note Only those clips with yellow corrupt clip markers can be restor
166. e P2 card recording status Use this mode to synchronise the time code with the time of day or to externally lock the time code SET Select this position to set the time code and or user bits R RUN Select this position to advance the time code only during recording For spliced scenes recorded on P2 cards the sequence of time codes is unbroken CURSOR and SET buttons Use these buttons to set the time code and user bits The four triangular buttons are the CURSOR buttons and the center rectangular one is the SET button For guidance in setting the time code and user bits see Setting Time Data page 48 Warning and Status Display Functions 7 Display window This window displays warnings battery remaining level sound volume time data and other information Note When the battery is installed the camera recorder LS indicates the data even if the power is turned off To turn off the data indications to keep the battery from being discharged specify OFF for the menu option P OFF LCD DISPLAY found in the TC UB screen on the MAIN OPERATION page 8 Rear tally lamp When the 2 BACK TALLY switch is set on ON the rear tally lamp behaves in the same way as the back tally lamp Parts and their Functions 1 Back tally lamp When the 2 BACK TALLY switch is set to ON the lamp behaves in the same way as the front tally lamp at the viewfinder 2 BACK TALLY switch This switch
167. e SDI IN connector when AJ YA350G attached 1 Confirm that the HD SD SDI input board AJ YA350G optional accessory is attached to the unit and that the wires are connected properly For details refer to the installation manual for the AJ YA350G 2 Confirm that the connected device has the same signal format as camera recorder 3 When signals are input from the SDI IN connector set the REC SIGNAL in the setting menu to SDI The REC SIGNAL item will be selected from lt SYSTEM MODE gt on the SYSTEM SETTING page Notes If the HD SD SDI input board is not attached REC SIGNAL cannot be set to SDI When nothing is connected to the SDI IN connector or there is no input signal images to be recorded will be black and no sound will be recorded Input the same signals as the format set in the SYSTEM MODE item in the setting menu through the SDI IN connector If the formats are different data will not be properly recorded on the P2 card Note the following points when the REC SIGNAL of the setting menu is set to SDI Audio signals are input from the SDI IN connector Audio signals must be input synchronized with video images Data will be recorded as 48 kHz 4CH 16 bit on a P2 card When the REC SIGNAL item is set to SDI signals input from the GENLOCK IN connector are disabled even if nothing is connected to the SDI IN connector Please note that there is a delay between video images and voic
168. e dirt Wipe the lens with a commercially available lens cleaner Do not wipe the mirror If dirt or rubbish is sticking on the mirror remove it with a commercially available air blower E Phenomenon Inherent to CCD Cameras Smears Smears may appear when shooting an object with very high brightness This phenomenon may appear more frequently as the electronic shutter speed increases a Replacing the Backup Battery The camera is shipped from the factory with a backup battery already mounted When the battery runs out the BACK UP BATT EMPTY display appears on the viewfinder screen for 5 seconds after the power switch is turned ON The internal clock stops operating when the battery runs out Also the TCG time code value returns to 00 00 00 00 and the time code backup is disabled The battery must be replaced Please consult your distributor for replacement with a new battery CR2032 The backup battery is visible when the panel on the LCD monitor side is removed right side when viewed from the front Note Please contact the store where you purchased the camera when replacing the battery 128 Maintenance and Inspections Maintenance E Connector Signals DC OUT 1 GND R TALLY 2 Open collector 3 REC START SW 12V OUT Max 1 5 A DC IN Matsushita part number K1AA104H0038 Maker part number HA16RX 4P SW1 1 GND
169. e signals when the unit is used on a system synchronized with the reference UMID information time code and user bits cannot be recorded on a P2 card using the SDI IN connector Connection with external device Connection with external device Connection using the SDI IN connector when AJ YA350G attached 125 Maintenance and Inspections Inspections Before Shooting Make sure you check that the system is operating normally before embarking on a shoot We recommend using a color video monitor to check the image E Preparing for Inspections Mount a charged battery pack Turn the power switch ON and check that 5 or more BATT indication marks appear f fewer than 5 BATT indication marks appear replace the battery with a fully charged battery E Inspecting the Camera Unit 1 3 Insert a P2 card into the card slot and close the slide cover Confirm that the P2 card access LED for the inserted card slot lights up in orange If P2 cards are inserted into multiple card slots only the P2 card access LED for the first inserted P2 card lights up in orange Then the other P2 card access LEDs light up in green when P2 cards are inserted If the access LED for the P2 card slot in which a P2 card is inserted keeps blinking in green or if there is no display recording is not possible on that particular P2 card Set the zoom to electric zoom mode and check the zoom operation Check that the image changes to
170. e unit must be inspected light Error message Description Remedies COLOR TEMP The color Select an appropriate HIGH temperature is too filter high COLOR TEMP The color Select an appropriate LOW temperature is too filter low LOW LIGHT There is insufficient Increase the light level light or gain LEVEL OVER There is too much Decrease the light level or gain CHECK FILTER The FILTER control is displaced Check the FILTER control TIME OVER AWB was not completed within the time allowed Shooting conditions may be unstable If flicker occurs press the shutter and readjust the AWB under stable conditions Retaining white balances Each value in memory is retained even if the camera recorder is turned off it will not be lost until the white balance is re adjusted White balances are stored in either of two systems A or B When the menu option FILTER INH is set to ON default each system stores only one value If this is the case the values are not synchronised with the filters This option can be found in the lt WHITE BALANCE MODE gt screen which is accessible from the CAM OPERATION page When the menu option FILTER INH is set to OFF the adjusted value for each filter can be automatically stored in the memory that corresponds to the position of the WHITE BAL switch A or B Your unit has four built in filters it stores eight 4 x 2 adjusted
171. e with the LINE MIX GAIN function or DS GAIN function to under 12 dB DS lt USER SW GAIN gt S GAIN 3 04B 3 61B 4 21B 4 81B 61BT 1 04B 1 24B 1 54B 2 04B 7 GAIN Settings Options and Usage S GAIN DS GAIN An analog gain increase with an asterisk is one that is valid One without an asterisk is invalid A cumulative gain increase with an asterisk is one that is valid One without an asterisk is invalid Adjustments and Settings for Recording Assigning Functions to USER MAIN USER1 and USER2 Buttons Adjustments and Settings for Recording 45 Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting Recording Levels AJ HPX2000 supports independent 4 channel sound recording in any recording format in HD 1080i or 720P and SD DVCPRO50 DVCPRO or DV with 480i or 576i modes When the AUDIO SELECT CH1 CH2 switch is positioned at AUTO the recording levels for Audio Channels 1 and 2 are automatically adjusted To manually adjust the recording levels position the switch at MAN Note that the recording levels for Audio Channels 3 and 4 are selected through a menu option Notes Even in HD mode 1080i or 720P 4 channel sound is recoded on P2 cards When SDI input signals or signals input through the DVCPRO DV connector are recorded the settings above are overridden audio signals from the SDI IN or DVCPRO DV connector are always recorded E Selecting Audio Input Signals
172. ed Delete the clips with red corrupt clip markers If the clip cannot be deleted format the P2 card During restoration of the clips however the defective clip indicator may change from yellow to red resulting in inability to restore the clips 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the clip you want to restore defective clips are indicated by corrupt clip marks Press the SET button to select the clip 3 Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select OPERATION REPAIR CLIP from the thumbnail menu 4 The confirmation window appears Use the cursor buttons and the SET button to select YES Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Deleting Clips 107 Reconnection of Incomplete Clips Incomplete clips may be generated when clips recorded on multiple P2 cards connected clips are separately copied to different cards Reconnection function generates one clip the original connected clip from incomplete clips 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor 2 Use the cursor and SET button to select incomplete clips to reconnect Usually thumbnails of incomplete clips clips with E marker are displayed in line 3 Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select OPERATION RE CONNECTION from the thumbnail menu 4 The confirmation window appears Use the cursor butt
173. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeteee 71 Selection of video output Signals ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeaaaes 72 Handling data oioi es A EE 74 Power SUP DIY tiie eea e eee aeran ranana annan naet Seea snip uasatevadeyceeanaunsaven 88 Mounting the lens and Performing the Flange Back and White Shading Adjustments ccccsseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeteee 92 Preparing for Audio Input ssssseeeseeeeeeeeeeeererrrrrrrrrrrrnnrnrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 95 Mounting the Camera on a Tripod eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 96 Attaching the Shoulder Strap seeeseeessseeeeeeerrereesserrrrrssessserrrsssses 97 Attaching the Rain Cover sssessssssssssesrssssserrrrrrserrrerrnnsssssrrennnnes 97 Connection of the remote control unit AJ RC10G 0 eee 98 Attaching the Front Audio Level Control Knob eeeeeeeeeeeees 98 Connection of the external SWitCN ccccccecccseceesseeeseeeeeseeeeeeaaes 99 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnail Manipulations Overview seses 100 Thumbnails Thumbnail Sereetinitdcutn dena a cususeawus 101 Selecting Thumbnalls ccccecceecceeeee eee eeeceaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteee 103 Playing back CLIPS ccceeeceeee eee eeceee cere ee cecaaeeeeeeesaaaeeeeeeeeeteeaaaes 103 Switching the Thumbnail Display cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 104 SNOUMarkn ee eae SW ae ea Sy 105 Text MEMO aa raaa anaia aan dee ee 105 Deleting Clips ai ie een lend 107 R
174. eenee 22 Warning and Status Display FUNCTIONS cc cece eeeeetteeee eee 23 Display Window Functions cccccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeteeseaaaees 24 LCD MONOT cir nerd ei 25 VIGWHINOS ec eui nr iesene see enea ad ae aaae an aaa a daa aaant 26 P2 Cans y cscccesscseccdeccdededeaana EEA A aAa E EE aa EE aaa eaaa 28 Basic Procedures iiaia ieee Eana E VuVu 30 Normal Record O a araa SAN OANA 31 PRE RECORDING function eeeeeeeseserreeerrrrrreessrrirrrrrrrrene 32 LOOP Recording aeaa AA 33 Recording Review Function ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaes 33 Normal and Variable Speed Playback cccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 34 Text Memo FUNCTION errre neeaaea a aaa aerei aaaeaii iiien 34 Shot Mark FUNGUO yroa S ANENE 35 Recording Setting and Operation Mode ssssesssssssseeeseaes 35 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Preparation Multi Formalia aniseed ae E E EASA 36 Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance ceeee 38 Setting the Electronic Shutter ccccccceeecceceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeteenaaaes 42 Assigning Functions to USER MAIN USER1 and USER2 BuitONStdetee ett alten enana aaa 44 Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting Recording Levels 46 Setting Time Data si ci ieee eesti 48 Viewfinder Screen Status DisplayS cccccseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteees 61 Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor 0 ccc
175. emaining free space RECORDING mode is switched by pressing the USER switch when MODE CHECK is being performed E If a video encoder card AJ YAX800G optional accessory is attached the KA KKM remaining free space on the SD Memory card will be displayed when the MODE CHECK button is pressed during proxy recording 31 Compression mode COMP This appears when setting the mode for suppressing distortion of compressed video images that may occur when dark parts are shot in 720P mode only P2 Card Remaining Free Space capacity Indication Status of Recording Menu option 5 P2 card remaining free space 6 P2 card remaining free space unit status P2 CARD REMAIN indication indication during MODE CHECK Under normal Other than LOOP TOTAL The total remaining free space of all Not provided conditions REC mode P2 cards loaded in the P2 card slots is indicated in minutes Example 30min ONE CARD The number of the P2 card slot Not provided holding the target P2 card together with that card s remaining free space indicated in minutes Example J 8min OFF Not provided Not provided LOOP REC mode TOTAL ONE CARD Indicated as LOOP Not provided OFF Not provided Not provided During MODE Other than LOOP TOTAL ONE CARD The total remaining free space and The number of the P2 card slot CHECK REC mode OFF capacities of all P2 cards loaded in holding the target P2 card together the P2 card slots are indic
176. emove the cap raise the 9 lens lever When the lens is not mounted replace the cap Light cable clamp Secures the light cable Lens cable microphone cable clamp This clamp secures the lens and microphone cables Tripod mount When you want to mount camera recorder on a tripod the optional tripod adapter SHAN TM700 is attached here LENS jack 12 pin The lens connection cord is connected here For a detailed description of your lens see the relevant manufacturer s instruction manual DC OUT DC power supply output socket This output socket is designed for 12 VDC It provides a maximum current of 1 5 A Connect an external switch to this socket to control REC starts and stops or an LED for use as a tally lamp For more information see Connection of the external switch page 99 Parts and their Functions Power Supply and Accessory Mounting Section Parts and their Functions 13 Audio input Function Section MIC IN microphone input jack XLR 5 pin A microphone optional accessory is connected here Power for the microphone comes from this jack A remote microphone may be connected When a microphone is used set the power to ON through the menu option FRONT MIC POWER These options are found in the lt MIC AUDIO2 gt screen on the MAIN OPERATION page AUDIO LEVEL CH1 CH2 audio channel 1 amp 2 recording level adjustment controls With the 3 AUDIO SELECT CH1 CH2 switch positioned t
177. ems Adjustable Heimharks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range FILE NO il Select the lens file number READ USER Read out the data from the user area in DATA the memory F l8 zheh READ Read the lens file data SCENE SEL 1 Select the scene file FI 4 WRITE Write the lens file data READ Read the scene file RESET ALL For resetting the all data of the lens file WRITE Write the scene file TITLE1 8 xx xx Up to 12 letters can be set for the title RESET Reset the scene file values to the initial KK KKK name values TITLE 1 4 Create the scene file title LENS FILE CARD R W SIFATI Items Adjustable Remake Note Data Saved Range For a USB DEVICE mode errors occur even if the READ CARDFILE fi For selecting the number of the lens file USER DATA item is executed since it does not access an SELECT in the SD memory card SD memory card Set PC MODE to OFF and then F execute the operation again READ For reading the lens file data from the SD memory card sq INITIALIZE WRITE For writing the lens file data into the SD memory card Items Adjustable SS She Data Saved Range Remarks TITLE READ For reading the title of the lens file in the READ The menu MAIN MENU OPTION SD memory card FACTORY MENU values are all reset to factory D a a DATA settings i os Note TITLE1 8 kKkKKX For setting a title consisting of not more The settings for the following are not eK jthan 12 characters reset
178. en the MODE CHECK switch is ICIU F R pressed DISP MODE f1 Set the DISP MODE 2 Switch the camera s Warning Message 3 indication Please refer to Display Modes and Setting Changes adjustment Result Messages page 69 for more IclulF R information VF OUT Y For selecting the video signals to display NAM in the viewfinder screen R Y Brightness signal G NAM Output signal with the highest B level among R G and B signals R Rech signal G Gch signal clulF R B Bch signal VF DTL 0 For setting the detail level of the viewfinder screen 5 The details of the signals for the viewfinder are further enhanced If O is selected then the detail is the same as IC U FIR that for the main line ZEBRA1 0 Set the ZEBRA1 detection level IRE DETECT value 70 clu F R i09 ZEBRA2 0 Set the ZEBRA2 detection level IRE DETECT value 85 clu F R i09 ZEBRA2 ON Set the ZEBRA2 to ON OFF or SPOT SPOT C U F R OFF LOW LIGHT OFF Set the camera incoming light volume at LVL 10 which to display LOW LIGHT 15 20 25 30 C U F R 35 RC MENU ON For the setting to display the menu in the DISP OFF viewfinder screen when the remote C U FIR control unit is connected to the unit 50M ON For specifying whether to enable or INDICATOR OFF disable the 50M LED inside the SD viewfinder when the REC MODE menu option is set to DVCPROSO In SD C U FIR mode only MARKER 50 Adj
179. ent temperature has changed substantially The gain switchover value has been changed or S GAIN super gain has been set with the USER MAIN USER1 USER2 button 1 Set the switches as illustrated below AUTO W B BAL switch OUTPUT CAM Used to perform ABB 2 Tilt the AUTO W B BAL switch so that it is positioned at ABB then release it The switch returns to the central position with the black balance automatically adjusted 3 During adjustment the viewfinder displays the following message ABB ACTIVE Note During adjustment the lens iris automatically becomes CLOSE 4 The adjustment will take effect in a few seconds and the following message will appear ABB OK The adjusted value is automatically stored in the memory Notes Ensure that the lens connector is connected and the lens iris is CLOSE During a black balance adjustment light is automatically cut off During a black balance adjustment the gain switchover circuit is automatically switched The viewfinder screen may flicker and or display noise this is not a failure lf you find the black shading annoying after performing an auto black balance adjustment adjust the black shading To do so go to the menu option DETECTION move the cursor then press the JOG dial button The menu option DETECTION can be found in the lt BLACK SHADING gt screen which is accessible from the MAINTENANCE page Note that press
180. ernally locking the time code Alternatively a composite signal can be input as the reference signal Note that the subcarriers for the down converter composite signal output from the camera recorder cannot be externally locked Notes When HD Y signal is input and RET is selected you can check return video on the viewfinder screen The menu option RET SW can be found in the SW MODE screen on the CAM OPERATION page When the mode is set to SD you can record original signals by specifying VIDEO for the menu option REC SIGNAL HD SD SDI IN input connector If installed the optionally available HD SD SDI input board AJ YA350G acts as an input connector for HD SD SDI signals You can record signals from this input connector by specifying SDI for the menu option REC SIGNAL For details refer to Connection using the SDI IN connector when AJ YA350G attached page 125 Parts and their Functions Shooting and Recording Playback Functions Section Parts and their Functions 19 32 33 34 DVCPRO DV connector This is an in output connector for video voice and data that comply with the IEEE1394 standard Notes Power is not supplied from the unit Be absolutely sure to bear the following points in mind when connecting the IEEE1394 cable DV cable Ensure that the connections with other devices are made on a 1 1 basis When a DV cable has been connected to the DV connector do not apply any st
181. erroneous operations E q a g ls USB 2 0 port DEVICE 2 Navigate the menu to open the SYSTEM MODE screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page Then set the PC MODE SELECT menu option to USB DEVICE and the PC MODE option to ON lt SYSTEM MODE gt SYSTEM MODE 1080i 59 94i REC SIGNAL CAM CAMERA MODE 60i VF TYPE HD PC MODE SELECT DEVICE PC MODE ON NS Note The function of the menu option USB may be assigned to a desired user button by using any one of the menu options USER MAIN SW USER1 SW or USER2 SW These options can be found in the USER SW screen which is accessible from the CAM OPERATION page When you establish the USB connection for the first time install the accessory P2 software for AJ HPX2000 on the PC Refer to the Installation Manual for the details Notes A USB driver must be installed on the PC AJ HPX2000 is only applicable to USB 2 0 not to USB 1 1 Only one unit at a time must be connected to the PC via USB The P2 card must not be removed when it is connected via USB While a USB connection is established the P2 card s access LED should not be lit except when access is being carried out When a USB device is active recording playback or navigation through clip thumbnails is disabled During a USB connection the USB LED on the side panel stays illuminated Also USB DEVICE is displayed in the sys
182. es When the Fire Store FS 100 is used as external storage the VITC UB MODE menu option on the TC UB screen on the MAIN OPERATION page can be set to FRM RATE to allow the FS 100 to indicate the shooting frame rate of the camera recorder on its display Note that when recording a backup with an external device connected to the camera recorder during REC RUN mode and there is insufficient storage space on the P2 card inserted into the camera recorder the time code output from the DVCPRO DV connector will not advance from that point lig Directions for using the 1394 connection When connecting the 1394 DV cable see 32 DVCPRO DV connector page 20 The AV signals may be disrupted by turning the power of the connected devices ON and OFF or by disconnecting and re connecting the I F cables It may take several seconds for the system to operate stably when the input signals are switched or operation is transferred from one mode to another Perform recording operation after the system operation has stabilized For recording data using the IEEE1394 interface input selection or for signals output from the IEEE1394 interface the AUDIO Volume on the side panel is disabled When camera recorder is controlled through PC application software etc take note of the following The scene to scene continuity recording from an arbitrary position on the clip is not possible Recording will always continue immediately after th
183. es 8 CARDS this format d NENUIMENU SET THUMBNAIL P2 STORE P2 STORE AJ Thumbnail viewing USB HOST PCS060G No writing writing back on a card can be performed basis and writing back Press the set button on a clip basis FAT For a hard disc drive Thumbnail viewing ALL HDD P2 fe ET Hoc with the first primary reading on a clip basis 01 ate s partition formatted in and formatting i i FAT 16 or 32 as seen Once formatted the 1 3 on personal computers hard disc drive can be 00 04 48 26 00 06 47 11 00 09 44 03 etc which requires a treated as a TYPE S 08 CONTENTS directory at HDD ig its root 00 00 00 00 OTHER Hard disc drives not Formatting SUNDER so PARAON NPESE described above Once formatted they AACO5G0052 DATE 2006 SEP 20 They are hard disc can be treated as a MODEL TIME 23 11 18 drives that have no TYPE S HDD ee SEE OMEINISHED CONTENTS directory or use the NTFS and any other file system instead of FAT 16 or 32 HDD EXPLORE 2 VENDOR corre NO MODEL DATE TIME This section indicates the vendor for the hard disc Ifpe PARTITION FAT drive 2 Slee Panasonic 3 MODEL 3 ers This section indicates the model of the hard disc drive xx012345 4 TERA E USED GB 4 SIZE CARDS A REMAIN IGE MENU MENU SET THUMBNAIL This section indicates the total storage on the hard disc drive 5 USED This section indicates the used space on the hard disc drive in GB and
184. estoring Clipse a a a e R RRA R A o iE 107 Reconnection of Incomplete CIlipS eeeeserereeeerreeeeeeerrenn 108 Copying Clips niria i iene 108 Setting of Clip Meta Data cece eee eeccneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteee 109 Setting of Proxy Optional cccceeeeeeeeeeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteee 112 Formatting a P2 Card cccecceccceeeeeeeeeeeccneeeeeeeeeteeeaaeeeeeeeeeaaaes 112 Formatting SD memory Cards ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeaeeeeeeeeetaaaes 113 Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode n se 114 Properties assis Racial ine ea ata 115 Connection with external Connection through the DVCPRO DV connectol cc0ccseeeeee 118 device Connection with external devices using the USB 2 0 port 120 Connection using the SDI IN connector when AJ YA350G attached ccceeeciecccsteeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeeeeteneaaaes 125 Maintenance and Inspections Before Shooting cccsccccscesecsecsesecsetscsesstsesseseteeees 126 Inspections Maint HaniGe erases cece sicrs tt 00t R 128 Warning System isnt ad hnnan nnn erais 133 Menu Menu Configurations eccasin0 toss ates etl ee ine Gea uaa 137 Menu Description Tables 00 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeenaaaes 141 Updating the firmware incorporated into the Camera reCOrdel eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 174 Sp cifications scroscio e a a a a a a aA a S 175 Attention Adjust the black balance setting when using the unit for the first time Refer to page 38 Set
185. f not USER value REGEN set by UB is recorded TIME Select local time hours minutes seconds DATE Select local date and time 2 last digits of year month date time TCG TCG value enters UB FRM RATE Select camera shoting information frame rate etc For more information see Frame rate information recorded in user bits page 50 REGEN Read out value stored in card and record value continuously Note When the camera recorder operates in 24P 24PA or 720P mode FRM RATE is ICU F always selected TCG SET ON ON OFF switching for the feature that HOLD OFF always starts recording when the power is turned ON again the TCG value that Iclu F was set before the power is turned OFF 5 f 03 Menu Menu Description Tables 167 Items Data Saved Adjustable Range Remarks Items Data Saved Adjustable Range Remarks FIRST REC TC PRESET REGEN u F For the first recording after the power is turned on a P2 card is inserted and then switching from this P2 card to another recording target P2 card is performed select whether or not to regenerate the time code as the value on the new P2 card PRESET Use the camera recorder s internal time code REGEN For clips recorded on the recording target P2 card regenerate the time code as the time code of the clip that has the most recent date and time Notes Set the date a
186. f white balances Adjustments and Settings for Recording Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance Adjustments and Settings for Recording 39 E Setting Color Temperature Manually The white balance can be manually adjusted by setting the color temperature Manual color temperature settings can be performed for each of the WHITE BAL switch positions PRST A and B The color temperature is set using the menu options COLOR TEMP PRE COLOR TEMP A and COLOR TEMP B These options can be found in the lt WHITE BALANCE MODE gt screen which is accessible from the CAM OPERATION page Note Even if the color temperature has been manually set automatic adjustment of the white balance AWB records the color temperature at the time of AWB at the position where the WHITE BAL switch was located When the CC filter position is switched the value for the color temperature changes gt lt WHITE BALANCE MODE gt FILTER INH ON SHOCKLESS AWB NORMAL AWB AREA 125 AWB B MEM ATW SPEED NORMAL COLOR TEMP PRE 3200K AWB A TEMP 3200K AWB B TEMP 3200K Viewfinder displays related to white balance See Viewfinder Screen Status Displays page 61 4Q Adjustments and Settings for Recording Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance Il Adjusting the Black Balance The black balance must be adjusted when You use your unit the first time Your unit has not been used for some time The ambi
187. face to the image formation surface Once adjusted the flange back does not need to be re adjusted as long as the same lens is mounted on the camera Note Please also refer to the lens instruction manual for directions on adjustment and locations of individual lens parts 1 Mount the lens on the camera Make sure you connect the lens cable 2 Set the lens iris to manual and fully open the iris Oa A Approximately 3m ey 3 Place the flange back adjustment chart about 3 m from the lens and adjust the lighting on the chart to obtain an appropriate video output level If the video level is too high use the filters or the shutter 4 Loosen the F f Flange focus ring clamping screw Note F b Flange back may be indicated on some lenses 5 Set the zoom ring to the telephoto position either manually or by electric drive 6 Aim the lens at the flange back adjustment chart and turn the distance ring to bring the chart into focus 7 Set the zoom ring to the wide angle position and turn the Ff ring to bring the chart into focus While focusing take care not to move the distance ring Q Preparation Mounting the lens and Performing the Flange Back and White Shading Adjustments 8 Repeat Steps 5 to 7 until the lens is in focus at both the telephoto and wide angle positions 9 Firmly tighten the Ff ring clamping screw Adjusting the Lens White Shading Method to correct the waveform to be mo
188. for fine adjustment of the sound recording level This control is Notes particularly effective for adjusting the sound level when Operation of the following P2 cards with AJ you are shooting without a sound recordist The control HPX2000 has been verified can be disabled AJ P2CO04HG AJ P2C008HG W Support for Built in Unislot Wireless Receive if the one time continuous recording exceeds the AJ HPX2000 is designed to support an optional slot in duration which is given in the table below when a P2 wireless receiver card with a memory capacity of 8GB or more is used in AJ HPX2000 the recording is automatically Wi Recording Review Capability continued on a separate clip When performing thumbnail operations such as display delete repair or copy for these kinds of clips using a P2 device it is possible to perform the operations for the entire recording as a single clip However with nonlinear editing software or a personal computer the recording may be displayed as separate clips This capability automatically plays back the last 2 to 10 seconds of recorded video allowing you to quickly check the recorded contents Hi Built in Time Code Generator reader A special purpose Subcode track can be used to record and reproduce time code information Recording format Recording duration Wi Support for Metadata HD 1080i 720P Approx 5 minutes AJ HPX2000 is capable of recording positio
189. formation see Handling SD memory cards page 75 2 Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to the CARD FILE SELECT item 3 Press the JOG dial button and the card file number will flash Turn the JOG dial button to select the file 1 to 8 to be recorded lt LENS FILE CARD RAW gt gt CARD FILE SELECTI 1 READ mr WRITE TITLE READ TITLE oND 1 Di 3 4 C A 4 Press the JOG dial button to enter the file number Give a title to the selected card file 5 Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to the TITLE item lt LENS FILE CARD RWW gt CARD FILE SELECT 1 READ WRITE TITLE READ gt TITLE ONBHM 1 rE 3 4 C J 6 When the JOG dial button is pressed the arrow cursor moves to the title input area and the input mode is established Now perform step 7 on page 84 through step 75 on page 85 Loading lens files from the SD memory card 1 Using menu operations open the lt LENS FILE CARD R W gt screen from the FILE page 2 Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to the CARD FILE SELECT item 3 Press the JOG dial button and the card file number will flash Turn the JOG dial button to select the file 1 to 8 to be read lt LENS FILE CARD RW gt vhhbay gt CARD FALE SELECTS 1 READ A i i WRITE TITLE READ TITLE Ron oND 4 Press the JOG dial button t
190. fully communicated from the adjusted on lt RGB BLACK optical channel to the digital channel CONTROL gt screen are reset steals fel and processed OFF The gains of Rch and Bch adjusted in lt RB GAIN CONTROL gt screen areenabled Furthermore the flare levels of LENS ADJ Rch Gch and Bch that are adjusted on lt RGB BLACK Fl CONTROL gt screen are enabled Items Adjustable Remarka oe DataSaved Range LENS R GAIN 200 For compensating Rch sensitivity of the 5 OFFSET lens used C F2 8 ADJ ON The iris is only set to F2 8 when this item 000 OFF set to ON Adjustment to F2 8 will be a ee executed on the lens F 200 FI6ADJ ION The iris is only set to F16 when this item pit pee 2 etre Beh sensitivity otithe OFF set to ON Adjustment to F16 will be 000 i AA aa ted on the executed on the lens Jae le Te i200 LENS R 000 For adjusting the flare level of Rch FLARE ioo BLACK SHADING JFJ LENS G 000 For adjusting the flare level of Gch Items Adjustable FLARE 100 DataSaved Range Remarks CORRECT JON ON OFF switching for digital black ES OFF shading compensation LENS B 000 For adjusting the flare level of Bch C U F R FLARE ioo DETECTION Execute digital black shading E DIG compensation Data adjusted on the LENS FILE ADJ screen can be stored on an SD memory card as a lens file WHITE SHADING The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode Items Ad
191. ge gain DS GAIN value when active indication 22 Gain value dB Current gain value 23 LINE MIX GAIN M This appears when LINE MIX GAIN 6 dB is active display 24 Audio input channel m Selected channel together with its audio level and level meter F AUDIO IN switch is positioned at FRONT WwW AUDIO IN switch is positioned at W L WIRELESS R AUDIO IN switch is positioned at REAR 25 Super black ON B Super black ON 26 Super iris ON S Super iris ON 27 Iris override Correction phase of the iris override when active indication On the open side by 1 On the open side by 0 5 No indication On the closed side by 1 On the closed side by 0 5 No indication Standard status 28 Iris F value NC Lens cable is not connected OPEN Lens iris is at maximum F1 7 F16 Lens iris value CLOSE Lens iris closed Note These indications are provided when the lens is capable of indicating the iris value When the iris is being overridden they blink 29 Zoom indication Z00 Z99 Zoom degree is indicated This indication is not provided for a lens that does not return the zoom position even if the indication is set to ON 30 PRE RECORDING P REC blink Indicated while pre recorded video and audio are being recorded on the P2 indication card If the USER switch is set to perform the PRE REC function either P SD memory card REC OFF or the specified duration 1s 8 15s is displayed when the PRE r
192. ghtness and stretched the dynamic range Notes Since the DRS function compresses the video levels of sections with high brightness there are slight differences in color development when the DRS function is turned on off When the DRS function is turned on the Knee function and the BLACK GAMMA function are not available The DRS function may be degraded when the LINE MIX gain and D ZOOM functions are enabled at the same time The function to turn on or off the assigned focus assist indication Note When the ASSIST button is turned on a graph is displayed on the viewfinder and the bottom right of the LCD monitor Adjust the focus ring on the lens so that the graph comes further right The function to switch to the mode that allows the JOG dial button to change the assigned color temperature It is useful for intentionally changing the color temperature after adjusting the white balance To change the color temperature press the user button with this assigned function and then press the JOG dial button The color temperature indicated on the viewfinder display is highlighted and starts blinking indicating that the color temperature can be changed While the indication is blinking the JOG dial button can be turned to change the color temperature At this time the value set for the position PRST A or B to which the WHITE BAL switch is set is also changed 44 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Assign
193. h cover and insert an SD memory card optional accessory into the SD memory card slot with the notch upward Close the lid Note An SD memory card must be inserted with the right side facing the slot If the card is hard to insert it may be reversed or upside down Do not force it into the slot Check the card before re inserting it To remove the SD memory card Open the lid of the switch cover and ensure that the BUSY lamp is not illuminated Then further depress the SD memory card towards the main unit This releases the SD memory card from the insertion slot Take hold of the SD memory card and remove it Close the lid SD memory cards must not be used or stored in an environment where they may be Exposed to high temperatures humidities Exposed to water droplets or Electrically charged For storage the SD memory card must be kept inserted into the unit with the lid closed E Formatting Writing and Reading an SD memory card To format an SD memory card write settings data or read data on an SD memory card navigate the menu to the lt SD CARD READ WRITE gt screen from the FILE page SD CARD READ WRITE gt R SELECT id READ W SELECT WRITE CARD CONFIG TITLE READ For an SD memory card formatted with a device that does not support SD standards the message FORMAT ERROR appears at the upper right of the screen In this case reformat the card as follows Note t
194. hat the indication FORMAT ERROR does not disappear if the SD memory card is replaced with this menu page open When the SD memory card is replaced perform TITLE READ To format an SD memory card Note SD memory cards may be formatted via the thumbnail screen For more information see Formatting SD memory cards page 113 1 Navigate the menu to the lt SD CARD READ WRITE gt screen 2 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the menu option CARD CONFIG Press the JOG dial button to display the following message CONF IG Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data Adjustments and Settings for Recording 75 4 To format the SD memory card turn the JOG dial To write set data on an SD memory card button to move the cursor to YES Then press the dial button When the SD memory card has been formatted the following message appears 1 Navigate the menu to the lt SD CARD READ WRITE gt screen To select a file number 2 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the lt SD CARD READ WRITE gt R SELECT a CONFIG OK READ thbay gt W SELECT SEE WRITE nat CARD CONFIG TITLE READ The card will not be formatted if the following message TITLE f i ic eee ERE A TE appears when the JOG dial button is pressed Q ttteates G tteetees RTT ET E E Error message Remedy L eS ene yi SD memory card cannot be formatted option W SEL
195. he lt MIC AUDIO2 gt screen on the MAIN OPERATION page 12 MONITOR volume control Used to control the volume of sound output from the monitor speakers and earphones 13 ALARM warning alarm volume adjustment Used to control the volume of the warning sound emitted from 14 speakers or earphones connected to the 15 PHONES jack If the control is minimised no alarm is audible Parts and their Functions Audio output Function Section 15 Shooting and Recording Playback Functions Section 18 31 30 SHUTTER switch Used to enable or disable the electronic shutter 1 CC ND FILTER filter selector control 3 Used to select a filter appropriate for illumination and color temperature of the subject When the menu option DISP MODE is set to 3 switching this control displays the selected filter number in the viewfinder OFF Electronic shutter disabled ON Electronic shutter enabled SEL Used to change the speed of the electronic shutter Examples of filter selection according to shooting conditions This dial switch returns to its original position Each app a Description of Shooting turn of the switch alters the shutter speed filter conditions For more information see Setting the Electronic control l Shutter page 42 1 3200K o sunset Cea odoo AUTO W B white black BAL switch 2 5600K 1 8 nvironments AWB White balance is aut
196. he audio channel whose signals are output to the speakers earphones or 15 PHONES earphones jack mini jack AUDIO OUT connector This connector is designed for audio monitoring stereo earphones When earphones are connected sound from the speakers is automatically muted Both the front and rear connectors output the same The channel indications on the display window and on sound the audio level meter in the viewfinder are synchronised with this selector switch CH1 2 Signals on Audio Channels 1 and 2 are output CH3 4 Signals on Audio Channels 3 and 4 are output Parts and their Functions 11 MONITOR SELECT audio selection CH1 3 ST CH2 4 selector switch The MONITOR SELECT switch is synchronised with the audio signal output to the speakers and earphones and from the AUDIO OUT connector CH1 3 Signal on Audio Channel 1 or 3 is output ST Stereo audio signals on Audio Channels 1 and 2 or Audio Channels 3 or 4 are output The stereo signals can be changed to mixed signals using a menu option CH2 4 Signal on Audio Channel 2 or 4 is output Monitor MONITOR SELECT switch switch CH1 2 CH3 4 CH1 3 Audio Channel 1 Audio Channel 3 ST Stereo signals from Stereo signals from Audio Channels 1 and 2 Audio Channels 3 and 4 CH2 4 Audio Channel 2 Audio Channel 4 You can select between stereo and mixed signal types using the menu option MONITOR SELECT This menu option can be found in t
197. he time code reader indication value in playback mode S IRIS Enables indications of the super TCG TCR iris ON status and the iris value Display the time code generator value S Enable indication of the super in recording mode and the time code iris ON status reader value in playback mode C U F R The display of the aperture value and E E the display of the iris override are SYSTEM INFO OFF Select the method of displaying system interlinked When the iris override is ALWAYS _ information and warnings NORMAL OFF Display no warnings other than changed it is forcibly displayed for 3 TURN POWER OFF and clu F R seconds SYSTEM ERROR CAMERA ID BAR For setting to record the camera ID ALWAYS f OFF BAR The camera ID is recorded when Always display warnings the color bar signals are recorded NORMAL OFF Disable ID mix Display warnings for 3 seconds only C U F R gt C U FIR when problems occur ID POSITION JUPPERR For setting the position to display the COMPRESSION ON Specify whether to enable or disable the UPPERL jcamera ID OFF compression indication when the LOWERR UPPERR Upper right camera recorder is in compression LOWER L UPPER L Upper left mode For 720P only LOWER R Lower right ON When the COMPRESSION clulF R LOWER L Lower left MODE menu option o
198. hese options are found in the lt MIC AUDIO1 gt screen which is accessible from the MAIN OPERATION page AUTO LEVEL Input level CH3 CH4 LINE MiC ON AGC ON AGC ON OFF AGC LIMITER OFF LIMITER ON Adjustments and Settings for Recording Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting Recording Levels Adjustments and Settings for Recording 47 Setting Time Data AJ HPX2000 supports time codes user bits date and time real time data which are recorded as data for the sub code area VIDEO AUX area and clip metadata files It also includes a CTL counter and camera ID E Description of time data Time code The TCG switch can be used to switch between Rec run and free run Free run The time code always advances even when the power is turned off It can be handled as time It can be slaved to the time code input through the TC IN or DVCPRO DV connector The time code is recorded as sequential values regenerated as the time code for a clip recorded on a P2 card Rec run User bits The camera recorder separately includes two types of user bits one UB is recorded in the sub code area and the other VITC UB in the VIDEO AUX area Each user bits can be recorded as any of the following a user defined value time date same value as the time code frame rate information for camera shooting externally input value through the TC IN or DVCPRO DV connector and value regenerated as the user bits
199. ignal and level for each channel FRONT W L REAR CH1 2 3 4 Input signal and level for each channel 64 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder Screen Status Displays Information Item Indication Status 11 Camera Warning and AWB A ACTIVE AWB being performed on Ch A Report Area AWB B ACTIVE AWB being performed on Ch B related to AWB ABB and switch settings AWB A OK K AWB B OK K AWB BREAK K AWB NG COLOR TEMP LOW COLOR TEMP HIGH LEVEL OVER LOW LIGHT TIME OVER ATW MODE AWB PRESET K CHECK FILTER ABB ACTIVE ABB OK ABB BREAK ABB NG B SHD READY B SHD ACTIVE B SHD OK B SHD BREAK B SHD NG AWB successful on Ch A AWB successful on Ch B AWB action aborted by user AWB action failed The second line indicates the status Color temperature too low Color temperature too high Brightness too high Brightness too low Action timed out This is indicated when AWB cannot be executed since ATW is being operated AWB cannot be performed because the AWB switch is position at PRE or the super gain is enabled Make sure the FILTER control is positioned correctly ABB being performed ABB action successful ABB action aborted by user ABB action failed Black shading accepted by holding down the ABB switch during ABB adjustment Black shading being adjusted Black shading adjustment successful Black shading adjustment aborted by user Black shading adjustment failed
200. in DV format unit independently 3 When the time code is in free run SETUP 0 Switch the setup For 480 59 94i only mode and a change is made to the 7 5 A 0 ue is switched to ae both SYSTEM MODE menu option the spears output andine time may not be correctly recorded 7 5 A Setup is switched to 7 5 for the After turning on the camera recorder camera output and 0 for the check the time code and make a IclulFIR recording change to the setting if required When USB DEVICE mode is selected PC MODE USB HOST Specify the operation mode of the TelulFl no change can be made to this option SELECT USB DEV camera recorder when an external device is connected via USB REC SIGNAL CAM Select video input signals USB HOST VIDEO CAM Record the signal from the Sets the camera recorder to the mode 1394 camera that allows an external hard disk drive SDI VIDEO Record the signal from the to be connected GENLOCK IN connector In SD USB DEV mode only Sets the camera recorder to the USB 1394 Record the signal from the 1394 device mode which allows a PC to be input connector connected via USB 2 0 for use with SDI Records input to the SDI IN P2 cards as mass storage connector optional Note Tay Notes When the PC MODE menu option is set After the power has been turned OFF _ _J_lF _ to ON no change can be made to this this setting defaults to CAM when the option z power is turned ON again PC MODE ON Used to enable or disable the m
201. ines For shooting images when adding effects to the subjects movement To use the half shutter speed HALF For shooting images when adding effects as if taken with film Notes No matter in which mode the electronic shutter is used the higher the shutter speed the lower the camera s sensitivity When the aperture is in the automatic mode it will increasingly open and the depth of focus will become shallower as the shutter speed is increased Video system SEES Shutter speed Half shutter speed pris SAA 1080 59 94i 60i 1 120 1 60 3 1 249 8 1080 29 97P 30P 1 60 1 30 2 1 249 8 1080 23 98P 24P 1 48 1 24 1 1 249 8 1080 23 98PA 24PA 1 48 1 24 1 1 249 8 720 59 94P 60P 1 100 1 120 1 120 1 60 3 1 249 8 720 29 97P 30P Ca 1 60 1 30 2 1 249 8 720 23 98P 24P HALF 1 48 1 24 1 1 249 8 480 59 94i 60i 1 120 1 60 3 1 249 8 480 29 97P 30P 1 60 1 30 2 1 249 8 480 23 98P 24P 1 48 1 24 1 1 249 8 480 23 98PA 24PA 1 48 1 24 1 1 249 8 1080 50i 50i 1 100 1 50 2 1 209 5 1080 25P 25P Wain 1 50 1 25 2 1 209 5 720 50P 50P 1 250 1 500 1 100 1 50 2 1 209 5 720 25P 25P 1 1000 1 2000 1 50 1 25 2 1 209 5 576 50i 50i ae 1 100 1 50 2 1 209 5 576 25P 25P 1 50 1 25 2 1 209 5 42 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting the Electronic Shutter E Setting the Shutter Mode and Speed The
202. ing In the case of Error Code 92 1394 INITIAL ERROR indicator lights up during pause Viewfinder and recording For Error Codes other than Error Code 92 or if REC SIGNAL is set to 1394 no error is displayed in the viewfinder Warning tone Beeps 4 times per second while ALARM recording is continuing Warning This indicates a failure either in the P2 card description recording or the recording circuit Recording The recording may stop or continue playback operation Restart recording Or turn the power OFF Countermeasures and turn it ON again before starting recording 1 34 Maintenance and Inspections Warning System Warning This indicates a failure of the DYVCPRO DV description connector The operation continues but input signals to daca the DVCPRO DV connector are abnormal aes For more information see 1394 Error P Codes page 136 Check the connection between the IEEE1394 cable and the DVCPRO DV connector settings of any external device Countermeasures and menus and the turn on the power again If the warning indication is still illuminated confirm the 1394 Error Codes page 136 and consult your distributor 9 Battery Nearly Empty 11 P2 Card Error Display window indication One of the bars in the battery remaining indicator starts blinking WARNING lamp Blinks once per second Tally lamp Blinks once
203. ing Functions to USER MAIN USER1 and USER2 Buttons AUDIO CH1 Function of switching the input signal source for Audio Channel 1 assigned Pressing the button switches the input signal in the following order FRONT W L gt REAR Note that the AUDIO IN switch can also be used to change the input signal later specification takes precedence Function of switching the input signal source for Audio Channel 2 assigned Pressing the button switches the input signal in the following order FRONT W L gt REAR Note that the AUDIO IN switch can also be used to change the input signal later specification takes precedence Function of the REC START STOP button assigned Function of the RET button at the lens assigned AUDIO CH2 REC SW RET SW PRE REC SLOT SEL PC MODE fe Setting the Switchover of USER SW GAIN PRE RECORDING switch ON switch OFF function assigned Function of switching the target P2 card among multiple cards assigned The function to turn on or off the assigned USB device or USB host mode Switching between the USB device and USB host modes is set by selecting the PC MODE SELECT menu option in the SYSTEM MODE screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page Note When the remote controller AJ RC10G option is connected and OVR or C TEMP is assigned to the USER button on the side of the AJ RC10G operation of the jog dial button on the main unit is disabled AJ HPX2000 allows three other modes
204. ing the ABB switch for longer than five seconds automatically performs an auto black balance adjustment followed by an automatic black shading adjustment For more information see the menu option SHD ABB SW CTL in SW MODE page 160 However when the remote control unit AJ RC10G optional accessory is connected automatic black shading cannot be executed even if the ABB switch is held down To cancel the automatic black balance adjustment in process the viewfinder displays ABB ACTIVE flip the AUTO W B BAL switch down to ABB again If automatic adjustment is cancelled the value in effect before automatic adjustment will be used Retaining black balances Each value in memory is retained even if the camera recorder is turned off Adjustments and Settings for Recording Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance Adjustments and Settings for Recording 41 Setting the Electronic Shutter This section provides a description of the electronic shutter together with setting and handling directions E Shutter Modes The table below lists the shutter modes in which the unit s electronic shutter can be used as well as the shutter speeds which can be selected To use the fixed shutter speed For eliminating flicker due to lighting For shooting fast moving subjects clearly To use the shutter speed of SYNCRO SCAN For shooting monitor screens in a way that minimizes the pattern of horizontal l
205. inning of the clip where the cursor is located No text memo can be added when the color bar is being output or the LOOP REC mode is used For a clip with voice memos added through the AJ SPX800 or any other camera recorder you can record up to 100 text and voice memos in combination For information about voice memos see the instruction manual for the AJ SPX800 34 Recording and Playback Normal and Variable Speed Playback Shot Mark Function A shot mark is added to the thumbnail of a clip to distinguish that clip from others With the LCD monitor only clips that have shot marks can be viewed and or played back Adding Shot Marks To add a shot mark during recording press the SHOT MARK button The viewfinder displays MARK ON and adds a shot mark to the thumbnail of the appropriate clip Another press of the button erases the shot mark SHOT MARK button Shot marks may also be added or erased using clip thumbnails For more information see Shot Mark page 105 Note The shot mark cannot be added or deleted when the color bar is output or set to the LOOP REC mode Recording Setting and Operation Mode AJ HPX2000 recording mode works according to the priorities outlined in the following table relative to the setting of the menus and switches Menu switches related to system recording Switches Prox y Functional recording operation mode REC LOOP REC
206. io device is input MIC Audio signal from a self powered active microphone is input The main unit does not supply power to the remote microphone 48V Audio signal from a passive microphone is input The unit supplies power to the remote microphone Wireless slot A Unislot wireless receiver optional accessory may be attached here FRONT AUDIO LEVEL audio recording level adjustment control This control adjusts the recording levels for Audio Channels 1 and 2 However when the 3 AUDIO SELECT CH1 CH2 switch is set to AUTO the level will adjust automatically and the 2 AUDIO LEVEL CH1 CH2 knob and this knob will not be active The control can be enabled or disabled through the menu options FRONT VR CH1 or FRONT VR CH2 These options can be found in the lt MIC AUDIO1 gt screen on the MAIN OPERATION page Audio output Function Section 9 AUDIO OUT connector XLR 5 pin 14 Speakers This connector outputs audio signals recorded on The speakers output EE sound during recording and Channels 1 2 or 3 4 reproduced sound during playback Output signals are selected with the MONITOR The speakers emit an alarm sound when the warning SELECT CH1 2 CH3 4 selector switch lamp blinks and or the indicator activates When the 15 PHONES jack is connected with 10 MONITOR SELECT audio channel CH1 2 earphones sound from the speaker is automatically iil CH3 4 selector switch muted Use this switch to select t
207. ions Warning System 135 A Error Codes The following error codes are displayed in the display window if an error occurs in the camera If an error code is displayed contact the dealer from which you purchased the unit Code No Description E 11 Video initialisation error E 27 Recording control error E 30 P2 card removal error E 34 LCD microcontroller error E 38 P2 streaming microcontroller error E 3F Microprocessor error in the camera control circuit E 63 Something is wrong with the system control microprocessor E 6F Reference signal error E 1394 Error Codes Code No Description Recording E eed Signals being input to the DVCPRO DV Stops 1394 E 80 connector are not 1x speed transfer signals in DV format Signals being input to the DVCPRO DV Stops 1394 E 81 connector are not 1x speed transfer signals in DVCPRO 25 Mbps format Signals being input to the DVCPRO DV Stops 1394 E 82 connector are not 1x speed transfer signals in DVCPRO50 50 Mbps format Incorrect signals are being input to the Stops Lene DVCPRO DV connector 1394 E 84 Signals being input to the DVCPRO DV Stops connector are not in DVCPRO or DV format Signals being input to the DYVCPRO DV Stops The time code section of the 1394 E 85 connector are not 1x speed transfer signals in display window indicates the DVCPRO HD format appropriate error code that 1394 E 8
208. is function the menu option LOOP REC MODE must be set to ON The option LOOP REC MODE can be found in the lt REC FUNCTION gt screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page Card1 Card2 Card3 cing a cot E recording starts recordsa Recording starts Recording Cycle 1 Recording Cycle 2 P LE The data is recorded in the free space of each P2 card in order of A gt B gt C When the free space is used up the content on A is erased to perform a new recording on D N J Notes When the loop recording capability is used each P2 card must have at least one minute of free space During loop recording the P2 CARD ACCESS LEDs for all target P2 cards illuminate in orange Note that if any of the target P2 card is removed loop recording stops When the menu option LOOP REC MODE is set to ON the viewfinder and display window both show LOOP However when only one card is inserted or when each card has less than one minute of free space the loop recording capability does not work even if the option LOOP REC MODE is set to ON If this is the case the indication LOOP flashes in the viewfinder and on the display window When the menu option LOOP REC MODE is set to ON the P2 card remaining free space indicates the minimum guaranteed recording time The minimum guaranteed recording time refers to the sum at the time loop recording is stopped of the remaining free space of
209. ith Thumbnails Thumbnail Screen 101 6 Duration The duration of the clip on which the pointer is located is indicated 7 USB HOST mode indicator Indicated when the mode has been switched to USB HOST 8 Clip Number The numbers set by the camera for all the clips recognised correctly by the P2 card These numbers are allocated in chronological order by shooting dates and times If clips cannot be played because of different recording formats they are displayed in red 9 i Defective Clip Indicator and 2 Unknown Clip indicator This marker is displayed for defective clips which may result from a variety of causes e g powering down during recording Clip with yellow defective clip indicators can be restored in some cases Please refer to Restoring Clips page 107 for more information A clip displayed with a red corrupt marker cannot be restored and must be deleted If the clip cannot be deleted format the P2 card When clips have different formats 2 is displayed instead of R 10 I Incomplete Clip Indicator Indicates that although a clip is recorded across multiple P2 cards one of these cards is not inserted into a P2 card slot 11 M Shot Mark Indicator This marker is displayed for a clip with a shot mark attached Please refer to Switching the Thumbnail Display page 104 for more information about shot marks 12 B Indicator for clips with proxy This marker is displayed for clips with proxy attached
210. iye READ W SELECT 1 WRITE CARD CONFIG TITLE READ TEPES 3 Turn the JOG dial button to select a desired number 1 8 Then press the dial button To read data on a selected file 4 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option READ lt SD CARD READ WRITE gt R SELECT A READ W SELECT si WRITE CARD CONFIG TITLE READ TITLE i theres 5 i there eee D thee Gi ttt renee B thee kae ee 4 thee Bi theese 5 Press the JOG dial button to display the following message READ VES ars RNS Pyyyys 78 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data 6 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES Then press the dial button When the data has been read the following message appears cr READ OK The data will not be read if any of the following messages appears when the JOG dial button is pressed Error message Remedy FORMAT ERROR SD memory card not properly formatted READ NG Insert an SD memory card NO CARD No SD memory card inserted READ NG The card has not been formatted using the unit Replace the card READ NG Write file data NO FILE No file found READ NG Only data written with the unit ERROR is readable SD memory card not readable READ NG Example The SD memory card CANNOT ACCCESS is not accessible because it is SD memory card not being pla
211. justable Remarks Data Saved Range CORRECT JON ON OFF switching for white shading OFF compensation C U FIR R H SAW 255 For executing the white shading R H PARA compensation manually RV SAW 000 The sawteeth shaped waveform and the R V PARA 255 parabola waveform of the respective G H SAW RGB channels are adjusted in the G H PARA horizontal direction and the vertical G V SAW direction G V PARA B H SAW B H PARA B V SAW B V PARA Fl Menu Menu Description Tables 171 DIAGNOSTIC1 DIAGNOSTIC2 Items Adjustable Remarka Items Adjustable Rerharks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range CAMSOFT Displays the version of the main SYSCON Display the software version for the MAIN software for the camera microprocessor SOFT system control microprocessor CAM TABLE Display the table version INRI LCD SOFT Display the software version for the LCD pa a Fe aa microprocessor PULSE FPGA Displays the version of the program for as orl a driving the CCD P2CS OS Display the OS version for the streaming an bie bes controller UCIF FPGA Displays the version of the program for ar oan GS the microprocessor interface FPGA P2CS AP Display the application version for the oa fet eGo Fa streaming controller FM FPGA Displays the version of the program for ata eile the frame memory control
212. k C U F R PC MODE CTL OFF shading automatically when the AUTO USER2SW INH Allocate the USER2 button For W B BAL switch is held to the ABB side S GAIN descriptions of the functions see C U FIR for 8 seconds or more DS GAIN Assigning Functions to USER MAIN COLOR BARS SMPTE For selecting the color bar to be used LINEMIX JUSER1 and USER2 Buttons page 44 FULLBARS SMPTE Color bar complied with the S IRIS SPLIT SMPTE standards OVR ARIB FULL BARS Full color bar S BLK SPLIT SPLIT color bar for SNG B GAMMA Satellite News Gathering D ZOOM ARIB Color bar complied with the ATW C U FIR ARIB standards ae S GAIN OFF L M H For selecting the method used to ASSIST S GAIN release the super gain mode CTEMP L M H Disabled when the gain AUDIO CHI selector switch is operated AUDIO CH2 S GAIN Disabled only with the S GAIN switch USER REC SW button RET SW C U F R PRE REC SLOT SEL The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the C U F R PC MODE preset mode 160 Menu Menu Description Tables Items Adjustable Remarks Items Adjustable Reniark Data Saved Range Data Saved Range DS GAIN OFF L M H For selecting the method used to AWB AREA 25 For
213. layback CTL count is reset Viewfinder Screen Status Displays In addition to video images the viewfinder displays lamps and text that indicate the settings and operating status of the unit together with messages a center marker a safety zone marker and the camera ID B Lamps in the Viewfinder Screen 1 5 TALLY REC part O oT 2 3 4 The above viewfinder is the AJ VF20WBP for further information on your optional viewfinder model see the relevant instruction manual 1 TALLY REC recording Lamp This lamp stays illuminated during recording and starts blinking if any abnormal action occurs For more information see Warning System page 133 2 Abnormal Operating Status Warning Lamp This lamp comes on when the unit is in any of the abnormal operating statuses specified through the menu sub option LED For statuses that activate the lamp see the options in the lt LED gt screen in LED page 157 BATT battery Lamp This lamp starts blinking a few minutes before the battery charge starts to run out and stays illuminated after the battery is completely flat The battery should be replaced before it is nearly flat so that operation will not be interrupted For more information see Warning System page 133 SAVE Lamp In the normal setting The lamp stays on when the SAVE switch is positioned at ON and the output of video and audio is power saved
214. lulF R 3t s clu F R 31 DTLCORING 00 For performing the noise elimination DTLCORING 00 For performing the noise elimination X level setting for detail level setting for detail 02 03 C U F RI15 SIC U F RJ15 H DTL FREQ 00 For performing the horizontal detail H DTL FREQ 00 For performing the horizontal detail is frequency selection is frequency selection s clu F R 31 s clu F R 31 LEVEL 0 For setting the LEVEL DEPEND LEVEL 0 For setting the LEVEL DEPEND DEPEND 1 When the Y detail is emphasized DEPEND i When the Y detail is emphasized details of dark sections are 3 details of dark sections are 5 compressed 5 compressed If the numerical value is larger details of If the numerical value is larger details of siclulFIR bright sections are also compressed siclulFIR bright sections are also compressed MASTER 0 30 For setting the master gamma 0 01 MASTER 0 30 For setting the master gamma 0 01 GAMMA ste GAMMA ste 6 45 p ss p C U F R 0 75 s clu F R 075 BLACK 3 For setting the gamma curve for the BLACK 3 For setting the gamma curve for the GAMMA dark portion GAMMA dark portion OFF 3 to 1 OEE 3 to 1 43 The dark portion is compressed 43 The dark portion is compressed OFF OFF Standard state Standard state 1 to 3 1 to 3 slclulFIR The dark portion is extended slclulFIR The dark portion is extended mMATRIX OFF For selecting the color correction table mMATRIX OFF For selecting the color correction table TAB
215. m mm a a a n F BATT E mu mu mm mm m a m F _ LOOP OP SLOT frm 00 dB 1 2 J Audio level meter in the viewfinder When operating the unit without a sound recordist it is recommended that the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control should be used to adjust the audio level In advance check the level meter in the viewfinder screen and use the AUDIO LEVEL control to adjust the appropriate audio channel so that no excessive audio signals will be admitted E Selecting Function for the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL Control This function enables the recording level to be adjusted using the F AUDIO LEVEL control To select this function perform menu operations to open the lt MIC AUDIO gt screen from the MAIN OPERATION page and set whether to enable or disable the F AUDIO LEVEL controls for the system selected as the input signals using the FRONT VR CH1 and FRONT VR CH2 items I cHs and CH4 Recording Levels lt MIC AUDIO1 gt FRONT VR CH1 FRONT VR CH2 MIC LOWCUT CH1 MIC LOWCUT CH2 MIC LOWCUT CH3 MIC LOWCUT CH4 LIMITER CH1 OFF LIMITER CH2 TOFF AUTO LEVEL CH3 ON AUTO LEVEL CH4 ON 25M REC CH SEL 2CH TEST TONE The following table shows the effects on the recording level for Audio Channels 3 and 4 that depend on the settings and input levels specified through the menu options AUTO LEVEL CH3 and AUTO LEVEL CH4 Note that the recording level cannot be adjusted manually T
216. may obtain from the above Web site 2 This product includes software licensed under the MIT License A description of the MIT is stored on the installation CD included with this camera recorder See the folder named LDOC The description is the original written in English Unislot is a trademark of Ikegami Tsushinki Co Ltd Other names of companies and products are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective companies li Contents General Parts and their Functions Recording and Playback Read this first eek a esea r a adnan a an 2 Features of Camera Unit cccicieivieicisisissescasacasacadsesvesssessveviandenndennnenaaes 7 Features of Recorder player Unit 0 cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeescaeeeeeeeee 8 Features of the Input Output Unit eee eee eeeetteeeeeteeetaaeeeeees 10 aT e E 1 eevee AAEE T LECCE CECECECECECE AAAA cere renee 10 DIMENSIONS GrAWING eect ee eee aaa E EANNAN ANANN 11 System Configuration s seken neant iainta akana na adeniin 12 Power Supply and Accessory Mounting Section cssssceeeeees 13 Audio input Function Section eee eeeeeeeeeeeteeeee eee eeeeeeettaaeeeeeeees 14 Audio output Function Section rerne 15 Shooting and Recording Playback Functions Section 0008 16 Menu Operation Section ccecccceeeeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeteeeaaaees 21 Time Code Section cccccccccccceeeeeeeccceeeeeeeeeccaaeeeeeeetteecaaeee
217. mbay 06 30 06 00 Dacca 06 00 Chicago 06 30 Rangoon 05 30 07 00 Bangkok 05 00 New York 07 30 04 30 08 00 Beijing 04 00 Halifax 08 30 03 30 Newfoundland Island 09 00 Tokyo 03 00 Buenos Aires 09 30 Darwin 02 30 10 00 Guam 02 00 Mid Atlantic 10 30 Lord Howe Island 01 30 11 00 Solomon Islands 01 00 Azores Islands 11 30 Norfolk Island 00 30 12 00 New Zealand 12 45 Chatham Islands 13 00 Notes In Step 4 if the TCG switch is positioned at F RUN or R RUN this also activate the internal clock To cancel date time and time zone settings in process hold down the SET button and position the TCG switch at F RUN or R RUN Clock accuracy fluctuates between about 30 seconds per month when the power is turned off If more accurate timekeeping is required check the time when the power is turned on and if necessary reset the clock When the GPS unit AJ GPS900G is installed and if it successfully receives time information the internal clock keeps accurate local time based on the received time Greenwich Mean Time and the time zone If the date and time differ from the actual local time the time zone may not be set correctly Check again to see if the time zone is set correctly The date and time need not be set again The built in clock operates for several years on a
218. mp on the OFF viewfinder on when the filter combination is anyone other than 3200K IC U FIR and CLEAR ATW ON For specifying whether or not to OFF illuminate the indication when auto ICIU FIR tracking white balance is activated The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode f 03 Menu Menu Description Tables 157 I CAM OPERATION CAMERA ID SHUTTER SPEED Items Adjustable Items Adjustable Data Saved Range remarks Data Saved Range Remarks ID1 xx Setting 1 for the CAMERA ID recorded SYNCHRO JON Allocate SYNCHRO SCAN as a shutter on color bars Up to 10 characters are SCAN OFF speed selectable by the shutter switch ClU F allowed for this setting lclu el ID2 Setting 2 for the CAMERA ID recorded POSITION1 JON Allocate the shutter speed set by on color bars Up to 10 characters are OFF POSITION1 SELECT in the lt SHUTTER ICU F allowed for this setting SELECT gt screen as the shutter speed D3 XKX Setting 3 for the CAMERA ID recorded c u F Secta D EDV INe SHUE SWIN on color bars Up to 10 characters are POSITION2 ON Allocate the shutter speed set by ICU F allowed for this setting OFF POSITION2 SELECT in the lt SHUTTER SELECT gt screen as the shutter speed ICIU Fl selectable by the shutter switch Note POSITIONS ON Allocate the shutter speed set by This setting is canceled whe
219. n READ FACTORY DATA is OFF POSITION3 SELECT in the lt SHUTTER selected SELECT gt screen as the shutter speed ICIU Fl selectable by the shutter switch POSITION4 JON Allocate the shutter speed set by OFF POSITION4 SELECT in the lt SHUTTER SELECT gt screen as the shutter speed ICIU FI selectable by the shutter switch POSITIONS JON Allocate the shutter speed set by OFF POSITIONS SELECT in the lt SHUTTER SELECT gt screen as the shutter speed ICIU FI selectable by the shutter switch POSITION6 JON Allocate the shutter speed set by OFF POSITION6 SELECT in the lt SHUTTER SELECT gt screen as the shutter speed ICIU FI selectable by the shutter switch The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the 158 Menu Menu Description Tables preset mode SHUTTER SELECT Items Adjustable Remarks Items Adjustable Remarka Data Saved Range Data Saved Range POSITION1 For setting the shutter speed for POSITIONS For setting the shutter speed for SEL POSITION 1 SEL POSITION 5 For 59 94 Hz 1 100 For 59 94 Hz 1 100 1 120 1 120 1 250 1 250 1 500 1 500 1 1000 1 1000 1 2000 1 2000 HALF HALF For50Hz 1 60 For50Hz 1 60 1 120 1 120 1 250 1 250 1 500 1 500 1 1000 1 1000 1 2000 1 2000 C U F HALF C U F HALF POSIT
220. n information is shown in gray Formatting a hard disc drive Switch the mode to USB HOST For more information see Switching to the USB HOST mode page 121 Connect the hard disc drive via USB Press the thumbnail button to display the thumbnail screen Press the MENU button and select HDD gt EXPLORE from the thumbnail menu The display provides a screen that shows the information about the hard disc drive From the menu select OPERATION FORMAT HDD and select YES using the cursor buttons and SET button Then the confirmation message is displayed again Select YES 6 The camera recorder starts formatting the hard disc A Q 7 drive Once formatted the hard disc drive can be treated as a TYPE S HDD Note Formatting a hard disc drive erases all contents of it Note that you cannot erase the contents of certain partitions by specifying them Writing data on a hard disc drive Switch the mode to USB HOST For more information see Switching to the USB HOST mode page 121 Connect a hard disc drive via USB A hard disc drive that has not been formatted with the camera recorder must be formatted as directed in Formatting a hard disc drive page 123 Insert a P2 card Press the thumbnail button to display the thumbnail screen Press the MENU button and select HDD gt EXPLORE from the thumbnail menu Then specify the slot that contains the P2 card bearing the data to be written to the h
221. n on the MAIN OPERATION page When using another battery which cannot be selected using the BATTERY SELECT item setting select TYPE A or TYPE B and set the items that correspond to the characteristics of the battery Please refer to BATTERY SETTING2 page 165 for more information Note For information about the V mount adapter plate please contact the store where you purchased the camera recorder Use of the external DC power supply 1 Connect the external DC power supply to the DC IN socket on the unit External DC power supply 2 Turn ON the power switch of the external DC power supply If the power switch is available on the external DC power supply 3 Turn ON the POWER switch on the unit Rush current may occur at the time for turning on the power of the unit We recommend using an external DC power supply capable to secure double or more capacity of the total power consumption of the devices connected to the unit such as the viewfinder and lights Use a DC cable with a capacity of 10A or more Confirm the pin arrangements of the DC output connector of the external DC power supply and the DC IN socket on the unit and connect the proper polarities to each other If the 12 V power supply is connected to the GND connector in error it may cause a fire or failure of the unit Pin No Signal e 1 4 1 GND O2 30 OTO 2 3 4
222. n the DATE TIME JON For selecting an option to display year OPTION MODE screen is set to OFF month day and hour minute second DARK COMP is indicated simultaneously when the camera ID is C U F R OFF No indication is given C U F R displayed SAVELED SAVE Set the SAVE lamp function ZOOMLVL JON Set the zoom position indication to ON P2CARD SAVE OFF or OFF The lamp lights up when the SAVE ClUlFIR ON OFF switch is set to ON and the output system assigned in OPTION COLOR TEMP JON Set the color temperature indication to MODE page 142 is in the save OFF ON or OFF mode C U F R gcei caer l SYSTEM ON For selecting ON or OFF for the camera H kreata e e cide MODE OFF mode and REC mode display remaining recording capacity is C U F R C U F R getting low CAMERA ON For selecting ON OFF of the dynamic MODE OFF range stretcher mode display The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the C U F R preset mode 156 Menu Menu Description Tables Items Data Saved Adjustable Range Remarks REC STATUS C U FIR ON OFF Select whether or not to enable REC indication in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor during recording ON REC indication enabled OFF REC indication not enabled Note This option is useful when camera recorder is used independently When the 1394 CONTROL menu option on the 1394 SETTING screen is set to BOTH then the setting of the REC TALLY me
223. nal informa DVCPROSO Approx 10 minutes tion latitudes longitudes and altitudes as UMID infor DVCPRO DV Approx 20 minutes mation metadata from the GPS unit AJ GPS900G optional accessory Names titles can also be Approximate Proxy Recording Time optional on SD recorded e g the camera person the reporter or the memory cards program which was registered on the SD memory card Card No MPEG64 recording rate in advance This information is also useful in managing Card Capacity 192kbps 768 kbps 1500 kbps information on clips Regarding SD memory cards please also see lt Cautions in using SD memory cards gt RP SDH256 Approx Approx 35 Approx 19 page 20 256 MB 2hour minutes minutes 17 minutes RP SDK512 Approx Approx 69 Approx 38 4 hour gt 512 MB 27 tinutes minutes minutes RP SDK01G Approx Approx Approx 77 1 GB 8 hour 2 hour min tes 56 minutes 19 minutes Approx Approx Approx oa A 18 hour 4 hour 2 hour 11 minutes 44 minutes 37 minutes Reference values when cards are used for continuous recording with our products Actual recording time depends on the kind of scenes and the number of clips For the latest information on P2 cards and SD memory cards not available in the operating Instructions visit the P2 Support Desk at the following Web sites https eww pavc panasonic co jp pro av General Features of Recorder player unit 9 Features of the Input Output unit
224. nd time accurately For guidance on setting see Setting the Internal Clock s Date and Time page 52 During operation in either 24P or 24PA mode regeneration of the value of the card recorded in drop frame is not permitted REC REVIEW REGEN P OFF LCD DISPLAY ON OFF Select whether or not to display the time code setting and counter indication on the LCD monitor when the power is turned OFF ON Display setting and indication while the power is turned OFF OFF Power down LCD monitor while camera power is turned OFF Setting and indication disabled ON OFF For selecting whether the time code is regenerated to the value on the P2 card or not when subsequent recording starts after setting the RET SW item on the SW MODE screen to R REVIEW and pressing the RET button on the lens or the USER button on the unit on which the RET SW function is assigned ON The time code is regenerated to the value on the tape OFF The time code is not regenerated UMID SET INFO Items Data Saved Adjustable Range Remarks COUNTRY NO INFO Input the user s country NO INFO is displayed until the input completes Input the user s organisation or company name NO INFO is displayed until the input completes Input the user name NO INFO is displayed until the input completes TC OUT TCG TCG TCR u F
225. nder to ON Shoot a white sheet of paper with no unevenness of color 7 Set the lens aperture control to manual and adjust it so that the zebra pattern covers the whole screen Check that the lens aperture is between F4 and F10 Notes The zebra pattern will not cover the whole screen if there is any unevenness in the lighting In this case make adjustments to the position of the lighting etc Make adjustments to the position of the lighting etc also when the lens aperture is not between F4 and F10 Be absolutely sure to leave the electronic shutter at OFF 8 Set the WHITE BAL selector switch to A or B and use the AUTO W B BAL switch to adjust the white balance automatically AWB Use the AUTO W B BAL switch to adjust the black balance automatically ABB Again use the AUTO W B BAL switch to adjust the white balance automatically AWB 9 Repeat step 7 10 Using the menu operation open the lt WHITE SHADING gt screen from the MAINTENANCE page and a range of items from R H SAW item to B V PARA item so that the waveform is more flat lt WHITE SHADING gt CORRECT ON gt RH SAW 000 R H PARA 000 R V SAW 000 R V PARA 000 G H SAW 000 G H PARA 000 G V SAW 000 G V PARA 000 B H SAW 000 B H PARA 000 B V SAW 000 B V PARA 000 Mas H SAW NMa Note Since fluorescent lights mercury lamps and other such kin
226. ng P2 card recording capacity is sufficient Please refer to P2 Card Remaining Free Space capacity Indication page 67 for information about P2 card remaining recording capacity N Set the TCG switch to R RUN Go Set the DISPLAY switch to TC A Press the camera s REC START STOP button to check the following items The P2 access LED blinks in orange The REC lamp inside the viewfinder lights up System warnings do not appear inside the viewfinder 5 Press the camera s REC START STOP button again This step confirms that the P2 access LED is on and showing orange and the REC lamp in the viewfinder is turned off 6 Using the REC button on the handle repeat Steps 4 to 5 to check the same operation Check the VTR button on the lens in the same way 7 Press the LIGHT button to check that the screen brightness in the display window increases 8 Press the PLAY button to check that the clip that has just been shot is played back from the beginning Check that recording and playback operate properly 9 When multiple P2 cards are inserted into the P2 card slots press the USER MAIN button to select the P2 card used for recording Repeat the operations in Steps 4 to 5 and 8 to check that recording and playback operate properly 2 Inspecting the Audio Level Automatic Adjustment 1 Set the AUDIO SELECT CH1 and CH2 switches to AUTO 2 Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to FRONT 3 Aim the micr
227. ni ac eae qc PETERS oi TON Tarres EaR pa aa 76 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data 6 Turn the JOG dial button until a desired character appears The characters that appear are switched in the following order Space oO Y Alphabetical characters Y Numerals Y Symbols Pa N AtoZ O0to9 7 Press the JOG dial button to accept a desired character 8 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the next digit clockwise and repeat Steps 6 7 to set characters up to eight characters To write data on a selected file 9 When the title is set turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to lt SD CARD READ WRITE gt The data will not be written if any of the following messages appears when the JOG dial button is pressed Error message Remedy FORMAT ERROR SD memory card not properly formatted WRITE NG Insert an SD memory card NO CARD No SD memory card inserted WRITE NG The card has not been formatted using the unit Replace the card WRITE PROTECT SD memory card write protected WRITE NG The card may be defective ERROR Replace the card SD memory card not writable WRITE NG Remove the card and disable the protect SD memory card has no free space WRITE NG Example The SD memory card CANNOT ACCCESS is not accessible because it is SD memory card not being played back accessible
228. normal operation The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode Menu Menu Menu Description Tables 173 Updating the firmware incorporated into the camera recorder For the most up to date information on firmware see the support page for P2 at the following Web site http panasonic biz sav To update the firmware confirm the version on AJ HPX2000 by selecting MAINTENANCE DIAGNOSTIC 1 and DIAGNOSTIC 2 screens from the menu and then access the above Web site to download the firmware if necessary Then load the downloaded file on AJ HPX2000 through an SD memory card to complete the update For more information on how to update the firmware see the above site Note SD cards used on AJ HPX2000 must be compliant with the SD standards In addition they must be formatted with the camera recorder If they must be formatted with a PC then download special software from the above Web site and use it to format the SD cards 174 Updating the firmware incorporated into the camera recorder Specifications General Power supply DC 12 V 11 0 V 17 0 V Power consumption 36 W Main unit only with LCD monitor OFF 43 W With the SDI IN and AVC Intra option installed LCD monitor ON indicates safety information Operating temperature 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F Storage temperature 20 C to 60 C 4 F to 140 F Camer
229. nserted press the Thumbnail button to open the thumbnail screen Be sure a P2 card is inserted for recording the clip displayed at the end of the screen and then switch the slot with the USER button assigned the SLOT SEL function so that data will be recorded on the P2 card 3 Press the RET button on the lens The message TC REGEN is displayed in the viewfinder During the next recording the time code of the last recorded clip on the card will be regenerated Note When a card with recorded data is changed the time code of the last recorded clip on the changed P2 card will be regenerated Time code function during battery replacement Even during battery replacement the backup mechanism functions allowing the camera recorder to operate continuously If SYSTEM MODE is changed a free run time code may shift After turning on the power again confirm the time code and reset if necessary Note When the POWER switch has been switched ON gt OFF ON the backup accuracy of the time code in free run mode is about 2 frames Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting Time Data Adjustments and Settings for Recording 53 E Externally Locking the Time Code The unit s internal time code generator can be locked to an external generator In addition the external time code generator can be locked to the unit s internal generator Example of connections for external locking As the figure sh
230. nu option for SYSTEM MODE is used PROXY REC ON OFF When a video encoder card AJ YAX800G optional is attached proxy recording information is displayed when recording starts ON Display indicating whether proxy recording is to be performed on the P2 card only or on both the P2 card and the SD memory card OFF Proxy recording information is not displayed MODE CHECK IND Items Data Saved Adjustable Range Remarks STATUS C U F R ON OFF For the setting to display the status screen when the MODE CHECK button is pressed ILED ON OFF For the setting to indicate causes for turning on the lamp on the viewfinder is displayed when the MODE CHECK button is pressed The causes for turning on the lamp are displayed with i For the setting to display the FUNCTION screen when the MODE CHECK button is pressed C U F R For the setting to display the AUDIO screen when the MODE CHECK button is pressed P ON IND ON OFF For the setting to display the status screen immediately after turning on the power of the unit Note Even if it is set to ON in this item the status screen is not displayed immediately after turning on the power of the unit when the STATUS item is set to OFF ILED
231. o MAN these controls can be used to adjust the recording levels for Audio Channels 1 2 Note that the controls are designed to be locked For adjustment each control must be depressed while turning AUDIO SELECT CH1 CH2 audio channel 1 amp 2 automatic manual level adjustment selector switch Use this switch to select recording level control mode for Audio Channels 1 and 2 AUTO Recording level automatically controlled MAN Recording level manually controlled AUDIO IN audio input selector switch Use this switch to select the signals recorded through Audio Channels 1 4 FRONT Signal from the microphone connected to the 1 MIC IN jack is recorded W L WIRELESS Signal from the slot in wireless receiver is recorded REAR Signal from the audio device connected to the 5 AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connector is recorded 14 Parts and their Functions Audio input Function Section 8 Note When you use stereo microphone AJ MC900G optional set both CH1 and CH2 to FRONT The signal from L CH is recorded to CH1 and that from R CH to CH2 AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 audio input channel 1 amp 2 connectors XLR 3 pin Audio devices or a microphone may be connected here LINE MIC 48V line input mic input mic input 48V selector switch Used to select the audio signal input from the 5 AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors LINE Audio signal line input from the aud
232. o enter the file number Now perform steps 5 through 8 on page 85 Note The card file titles on the SD memory card are displayed on the lt LENS FILE CARD R W gt screen but the titles of the lens files contained in the card files are not shown on this screen To display these titles load the files and check the titles on the lt LENS FILE gt screen The lens files in the unit s internal memory will be rewritten as the loaded lens files at this time For this reason save the lens files in the internal memory onto the SD memory card first to back them up before loading them on the SD memory card Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data Adjustments and Settings for Recording 87 Preparation Power Supply A battery pack or an external DC power supply can be used as AJ HPX2000 s power supply Using a Battery Pack Battery packs from the following manufacturers can be used e Anton Bauer e IDX e PACO e Sony The type of the battery can be checked or changed through the viewfinder or menu screen on the monitor Pressing the MODE CHECK button on the side of the camera recorder displays the current type of the battery in the upper right corner of the viewfinder display Navigate the menu to open the BATTERY P2CARD screen from the MAIN OPERATION page Then through the BATTERY SELECT menu option you can check and change the battery type lt BATTERY P2CARD gt
233. o fine adjust images while monitoring the output waveform of the camera using the waveform monitor Normally this adjustment requires assistance from a video engineer This menu option may be set with an external remote controller and is useful when using the unit without a sound recordist VF Used to select the information items to be displayed in the viewfinder screen CAM OPERATION Used to change settings according to the conditions for the subject MAIN OPERATION Used to specify recording related items such as audio settings time code battery and P2 card remaining amounts FILE Used to specify file related items such as SD memory card reading writing and lens file settings MAINTENANCE Used to specify maintenance related items USER MENU SELECT Used to edit USER MENU OPTION MENU Provides options which may be needed if functions are added in the future To display OPTION MENU hold down the LIGHT button and press the MENU button For more information contact your distributor 138 Menu Menu Configuration JOG dial button Shot Mark Cancel Menu button MENU button ia Setting Menu Options The menu options are set with the MENU and JOG dial buttons The menu comprises main menu sub menus and options menus The data specified through menu options are written and saved in the internal memory of the unit This section describes how to set options in MAIN MENU The other menus can
234. ode that In order to select VIDEO and OFF allows the camera recorder to be synchronize video signals input to the connected to a PC or an external hard GENLOCK IN connector VBS with dskedrive via USB 2 0 the unit set the GENLOCK item of ON Sets the camera recorder to the ZTclulFIR GENLOCK page 145 to EXT mode selected through the PC MODE SELECT menu option CAMERA 1080 59 94i For setting the video system for OFF Disables the PC MODE for normal MODE 480 59 94i shooting operation 60i Note 30P Once the power is turned off the option 24P is always set to OFF when the power is 24PA F turned on next time 1080 50i 576 50i er 50i The ___ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the 25P preset mode 720 59 94P 60P 30P 24P 720 50P 50P C U F R 25P ASPECT 16 9 Select the aspect ratio for recording In 4 3 SD mode only 16 9 Record in lt 16 9 gt aspect ratio IC U FIR 4 3 Record in lt 4 3 gt aspect ratio f Menu Menu Description Tables 141 OPTION MODE Items Data Saved Adjustable Range Remarks Items Data Saved Adjustable Range Remarks REC TALLY RED GREEN CHAR u F Select the method for displaying the recording status of camera recorder when controlling an external VTR by setting 1394
235. oltage in 0 1 13 8 V steps 19 2 V steps cu F 5 c u F 5 TRIMPAC14 x Enable selection under BATTERY NP L7 pk Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT SELECT x Enable selection x Enable selection e Disable selection e Disable selection AUTO Select auto or manual to set the NEAR AUTO Select auto or manual to set the NEAR MANUAL END voltage MANUAL END voltage AUTO Set voltage automatically AUTO Set voltage automatically MANUAL Set voltage manually MANUAL Set voltage manually 11 0 When MANUAL is selected in the menu 11 0 When MANUAL is selected in the menu above set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 above set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 13 6 V steps 132 V steps c u F 150 c u F 150 HYTRON50 gt Enable selection under BATTERY ENDURA7 pk Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT SELECT gt Enable selection Enable selection e Disable selection e Disable selection AUTO Select auto or manual to set the NEAR AUTO Select auto or manual to set the NEAR MANUAL END voltage MANUAL END voltage AUTO Set voltage automatically AUTO Set voltage automatically MANUAL Set voltage manually MANUAL Set voltage manually 11 0 When MANUAL is selected in the menu 11 0 When MANUAL is selected in the menu above set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 above set the NEAR END voltage in 0 1 138 V steps 132 V steps c u F 150 c u F 150 HYTRON140 x Enable selection under BATTERY ENDURA10 Enable
236. om the thumbnail menu Move to the appropriate partition and select it with the SET button Q From among the thumbnails select the clips to be written to the P2 card 6 Press the MENU button and select OPERATION gt IMPORT SELECTED CLIPS Then specify the slot that contains the target P2 card 7 Select YES to start writing data back to the P2 card 8 When the writing is completed the message COPY COMPLETED is displayed Note When only selected files are written no verification is per formed For a Type S or P2 STORE hard disc drive you have the choice of writing data on a card basis The target P2 cards must be preformatted 1 Switch the mode to USB HOST For more information see Switching to the USB HOST mode page 121 Connect a hard disc drive via USB Insert the target P2 cards in slots WG RN Press the MENU button and select HDD gt EXPLORE Then move to the appropriate partition and select it with the SET button Q From the thumbnail menu select OPERATION IMPORT ALL Then specify the slots that contain the empty target P2 cards 6 Select YES to start writing data to the cards lt For your information gt To disable verification during writing select HDD gt SETUP from the thumbnail menu and set the option VERIFY to OFF This speeds up writing without verifying data writing 7 When the writing is completed the message COPY COMPLETED is displayed
237. omatically adjusted F Cloudy rainy outdoor When the WHITE BAL switch on the side is 3 5600 environments positioned at A or B the adjusted value is Clear bright scenes stored in the memory 4 5600K 1 64 such as snowscape Note that when the switch is positioned at high mountains PRST this function does not work poachesete ABB Back balance is automatically adjusted 2 USER MAIN USER 1 and USER 2 butt To automatically correct black shading the i i ana Sy aide AUTO W B BAL switch must be pressed These buttons can be assigned user selected toward ABB for longer than 8 seconds functions using a menu option Each button when pressed performs the assigned function Note For more information see Assigning Functions to USER MAIN USER1 and USER2 Buttons page 44 To stop automatic adjustment of the white or black balance in progress set the switch to either AWB or ABB If automatic adjustment is cancelled the value in effect before automatic adjustment will be used 16 Parts and their Functions Shooting and Recording Playback Functions Section 5 Gain selector switch Use this switch to select video amplifier gain according to lighting conditions under which you are shooting The values for L M and H can be preset using menu options MODE CHECK button Each press of this button changes the screen type in the viewfinder in the following order STATUS LED FUNCTION AUDIO This does no
238. ons and SET button to select YES Note RA indication stays illuminated until all the incomplete clips that comprise the original clip are reconnected Copying Clips Selected clips can be copied to the P2 card or SD memory card in the desired slot 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer to the desired clip and press the SET button 3 Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select OPERATION COPY from the thumbnail menu Select Slot 1 5 or SD memory card as the destination r A HOD FORMAT REPAIR CLIP RE CONNECTION PROPERTY META DATA DEVICE SETUP EXIT 00 00 45 12 00 09 44 03 480 601 00 00 00 00 Dur 00 00 50 11 4 The confirmation window appears Use the cursor buttons and SET button to select YES P21 A oo od THUMBNAIL OPERATION PROPERTY gt META DATA DELETE FORMAT REP copy 2 CLIPS RE E no EXIT Dur 00 00 50 11 EEE 400 601 Notes Do not turn off the power or remove a P2 card while data is being copied Doing so may cause the P2 card to fail If you should accidentally perform one of the above operations defective clips will be generated Delete them and then copy them again When clips are copied to P2 cards all the information on the clips is copied However when they are copied to the SD memory card 1 video and sound information is no
239. ophone connected to the MIC IN jack at an appropriate sound source Then check that the level displays for both CH1 and CH2 change according to the sound level 3 Inspecting the Audio Level Manual Adjustment 1 Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to FRONT 2 Set the AUDIO SELECT CH1 and CH2 switches to MAN 3 Turn the AUDIO LEVEL CH1 and CH2 controls Check that the level display increases when the controls are turned to the right 4 Inspecting the Earphone and Speaker 1 Turn the MONITOR control to check that the speaker volume changes 2 Connect an earphone to the PHONES jack Check that the speaker is turned off and the microphone sound can be heard from the earphone 3 Turn the MONITOR control to check that the earphone volume changes 5 Inspection for Using an External Microphone 1 Connect an external microphone to the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 connectors 2 Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to REAR 3 Set the LINE MIC 48V selector switches on the rear panel to MIC or 48V depending on the power supply type of the external microphone MIC For a microphone with internal power supply 48V For a microphone with external power supply 4 Aim the microphone at a sound source Then check that the audio level meter in the display window and the audio level display inside the viewfinder change according to the sound level The channels can also be checked separately by connecting a single microphone
240. or not to set the alarm to ENDURA10 DIONIC90 while the same for TYPE B is ALARM OFF beep for P2 CARD END ALARM ENDURA D set to HYTRON140 ICU F PAG L95 eae a i Pee CARD 3min Set the length of time for one segment BP L65 95 ta a ONY IS USOC SOLIUS 10 D T REMAIN 5min m m of the P2 card s remaining capacity NICD14 indicator bars TYPE A 3min m One segment represents 3 C U F TYPE B minutes 5 EXTDCIN AC ADPT Set the remaining capacity detection Smin m One segment represents 5 D SELECT PROPAC14 type when a battery is connected to the C U F minutes TRIMPAC14 DC IN connector Remaining capacity HYTRONSO detection is also performed according to The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the HYTRON140 the selected battery type DIONIC90 The variable range is changed by the DIONIC160 litem settings selected on the BATTERY NP L7 SETTING1 page 164 and BATTERY ENDURA7 SETTING2 page 165 menus ENDURA10 Analog voltage is displayed on the ENDURA D_ Viewfinder screen PAG L95 When BP GL65 or BP GL95 a battery BP L65 95 made of Sony is used set this to BP NICD14 L65 95 preset mode TYPE A C U F TYPE B BATT NEAR JON Select whether or not to set the alarm to END ALARM OFF beep for BATT NEAR END ALARM CIU F BATT NEAR JON If set to ON the warning tone and END CANCEL OFF indication can be canceled by pressing the MODE CH
241. ording 630TV format is set to 720P S C U FJR 7201V H DTLLINE 0H For setting the number of scanning lines MIX 1H to be added to the video signals in order 2H to generate the horizontal detail signals SIC U FIR In HD mode only MASTER DTL 31 For revising the master detail level 00 s c u F R 31 The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode 150 Menu Menu Description Tables SKIN TONE DTL Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range mSKIN TONE OFF For selecting the skin color table for DTL A enabling the skin tone detail B The skin color table is provided in the AB SKIN TONE TABLE item By enabling the skin tone detail it is possible to shoot human skin more SIC U FIR accurately MSKIN TONE JON For the setting to display the zebra ZEBRAVF OFF pattern in the skin tone area displayed in the viewfinder screen The zebra pattern is displayed when this item is turned ON and the lt SKIN TONE DTL gt screen is opened The zebra pattern is displayed on area A or B which is selected in the SKIN TONE TABLE item It is impossible to display both area A S C UIF R and B at the same time SKIN TONE JA For selecting the skin color table for TABLE B subjects to which the skin tone table siclulF R applies SKIN TONE For fetching the color informa
242. osite video signals are output Signals are down converted in HD mode VIDEO OUT CHARACTER switch This switch controls the superimposition of characters onto the video output from the VIDEO OUT connector ON Characters are superimposed OFF Characters are not superimposed For types of characters see Settings of signals output from VIDEO OUT connector page 72 VIDEO OUT video signal output connector This connector outputs video signals The video signals linked to the settings of 15 VIDEO OUT switch 16 VIDEO OUT CHARACTOR switch and 19 0UTPUT SEL switch are output from here GD S REW STOP 18 19 FF PLAY PAUSE 20 21 22 23 fot T aenar E RERED 7 Te 18 31 30 MON OUT monitor output connector Used to output down converted analog composite signals for the monitor The video signals linked to the setting of the OUTPUT SEL switch are output from here Through an internal menu option the characters can be superimposed independently of the VIDEO OUT connector For more information see Settings of signals output from MON OUT connector page 73 OUTPUT SEL output signal selection switch Used to switch the signals output from the VIDEO OUT and MON OUT connectors MEM Video from the camera is output during recording or when recording is paused or playback signals are output from the P2 card during playback Video from the camera is output constantl
243. ote The indication MKR A at the upper right of the screen shows the current indication status To view TABLE B press the MARKER SELECT button This changes the indication to MKR B allowing you to view the settings E Marker Check Screen Displays MARKER SELECT button function The viewfinder can display a screen that allows you to view the marker settings of the unit Pressing the MARKER SELECT button on the camera recorder switches the marker indication as follows Marker A Marker B No marker If the menu option FRAME SIG is set to 16 9 as the information of Marker A and 4 3 as the information of Marker B then the 16 9 and 4 3 view angles can easily be checked with the button as required Markers Center Safety zone The view angle specified through the menu option FRAME SIG is displayed E Checking Return Video Signal in the Viewfinder The viewfinder displays the return video signal input to the GENLOCK IN connector while the RET button at the lens is held down To enable this capability select CAM RET for the menu option RET SW This option can be found in the lt SW MODE gt screen which is accessible from the CAM OPERATION page lt SW MODE gt RET SW R REVIEW S BLK LVL 2 10 AUTO KNEE SW ON SHD ABB SW CTL ON COLOR BARS SMPTE S GAIN OFF L M H DS GAIN OFF DS GAIN D ZOOMX2 ON D ZOOMX3 ON D ZOOMX4 ON RC CHECK SW R REVIEW 70 Adjustments and Settings for Reco
244. ote control 8 INC Not used 9 UNREG 12V DC 12 V power supply AJ RC10G Max 0 75 A 10 GND GND VF 1 UNREG 12V DC 12 V power supply AJ HVF21G About 0 35 A 2 UNREG 12V DC 12 V power supply 3 A9 0V DC 9 V power supply not used 4 VF PB GND GND for the viewfinder Ps signals 5 VF PR GND GND for the viewfinder PR signals 6 VF Y Viewfinder Y signals output 7 VF Y GND GND for the viewfinder Y signals 8 VF CLK Serial data clock pulse signals 9 VF WR Pulse signals for reading serial parallel conversion data 10 VF DATA Serial data signals for serial parallel conversion 11 UNREG GND GND 12 ZEBRA SW ON OFF of the zebra signals 13 PEAKING Control of the peaking not used 14 SPARE Standby not used 15 VF PR Viewfinder Pr signal output 16 VF PB Viewfinder PB signal output 17 MARKER SW ON OFF of the marker not used 18 FRONT VR FRONT AUDIO LEVEL adjustment not used 19 VR GND GND for the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL not used 20 UNREG GND GND Caution Total amount of current from the respective connectors for DC OUT REMOTE VF and LENS should not exceed 2 5 A 130 Maintenance and Inspections Maintenance Maker part number HR10A 10R 10SC 71 Hirose Denki Connector at the cable side Maker part number HR10A 10P 10P 73 Hirose Denki Matsushita part number K1AB120H0001 Maker part number HR12 14RA 20SC Hirose Denki LENS 1 RET SW ON OFF of the return video RETURN ON GND RETURN OFF OPEN 2 REC S
245. oth of the unit and AJ RC10G are turned on the unit automatically enters the remote control mode The remote control mode is released when AJ RC10G is removed or the power for the AJ RC10G is turned OFF Switch functions in the remote control mode In the remote control mode the following switches and buttons on the unit are disabled SHUTTER switch MENU button JOG dial button GAIN switch OUTPUT AUTO KNEE switch WHITE BAL switch USER MAIN button USER 1 button USER 2 button If you use the Front Audio Level control frequently attach the accessory knob so that it can be easily operated Knob Accessory Front Audio Level Control Screw Accessory Remove the screw in the center of the Front Audio Level control and attach the accessory knob using the screw included When attaching the knob be sure to align the marks on the control with the marks on the knob Recording and playback Operations in the remote control mode When the remote control is connected recording and playback can be controlled through both the camera recorder and the AJ RC10G Notes The state that was adjusted by connecting AJ RC10G is stored in the unit Not to store the adjusted state in the unit open the FUNCTION MENU of AJ RC10G to set the RC DATA SAVE item to OFF When the dedicated cable is connected or removed ensure that the POWER switches on both the main
246. ows connect both the reference video signal and reference time code Example 1 When locking onto an external signal Reference time GENLOCK IN Reference video signal Note In place of the HD Y reference signal composite video signals can be input as the reference video signal 54 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting Time Data Example 2 When connecting a multiple number of units and using one of them as the reference unit MON OUT or VIDEO OUT VBS MON OUT or VIDEO OUT VBS MON OUT or VIDEO OUT VBS To the next camera Note The system can be configured with multiple units by opening the lt GENLOCK gt screen from the SYSTEM SETTING page and setting the GL PHASE item to the connector using menu operations The phase of the time code can correspond to either the HDY output signals of the MON OUT connector or VBS output signals of the VIDEO OUT and MON OUT connector However the same value should commonly be set to the GL PHASE for all cameras If different values coexist in the system the shooting timing may not correspond to each other Reference video signal Setting of GL PHASE MON OUT VBS or COMPOSIT VIDEO OUT VBS Setting of GL PHASE Item Variable Remarks range GL PHASE HD SDI For selecting the output signals that COMPOSIT lock phases to the signals that are input in the GENLOCK IN connector HD SDI
247. p operations of external devices that are connected to the DVCPRO DV connector OFF Do not control the externally connected devices BOTH To control both the unit and the IC U F externally connected devices 1394 CMD SEL REC_P For setting the control of recording stop STOP operations of the external devices that are connected to the DVCPRO DV connector REC_P Operation to pause recording Clu F STOP Stopping operation The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode 3 f 03 Menu Menu Description Tables 145 PAINT RB GAIN CONTROL RGB BLACK CONTROL 146 Menu Menu Description Tables preset mode Items Adjustable Remarks Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range R GAIN AWB 200 For setting the Rch gain when the MASTER PED 200 For setting the level of the master PRE WHITE BAL switch is in the PRST pedestal 000 position e016 if the remote control unit is 200 lf the remote control unit is 200 connected settings made from the connected settings made from the menu are disabled The set
248. pear at the top and bottom of the viewfinder screen fie read the lens file from the builtin memory 1 2 A Using menu operations open the lt LENS FILE gt screen from the FILE page Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to the FILE SELECT item Press the JOG dial button and the file number will flash Turn the JOG dial button to select the file 1 to 8 to be read lt LENS FILE gt viddi Prryys gt FILE NO READ WRITE RESET ALL TITLE Rona oND L Press the JOG dial button to enter the file number Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to the READ item lt LENS FILE gt FILE NO id gt READ WRITE RESET ALL TITLE Roms oND 6 When the JOG dial button is pressed the following message appears 7 Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to YES and press the JOG dial button The recorded correction values for the white shading flare and RB gain offset are read Press the MENU button The setting menu is cleared and the displays showing the unit s current statuses appear at the top and bottom of the viewfinder screen Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data Adjustments and Settings for Recording 85 Bi write in and read out the lens file to from the SD memory card The contents of the eight lens files stored in the unit s internal memory can be saved onto an SD memo
249. per second Viewfinder The BATT LED blinks Display window indication If the error occurs during recording 00 0000 11 appears as the time code indication The indication continues to flash after recording is stopped and until the next operation is performed There is no indication if the error occurs during playback Warning tone Beeps 4 times per second WARNING lamp If the error occurs during recording the lamp flashes four times per second for a period of about three seconds The lamp does not light if the error occurs during playback If the error occurs during recording the lamp flashes four times per second for a period of warning The battery is about to run out description Recording playback Continues to operate operation Countermeasures Replace the battery as required 10 P2 Card Nearly Full Taly lamp about three seconds The lamp does not light if the error occurs during playback A flashing CARD ERR appears In the S actual indication the is replaced by the slot Viewfinder number of the P2 card that triggered the error Warning tone If the error occurs during recording the tone sounds four times per second for a period of about three seconds The tone does not sound if the error occurs during playback Warning An error has occurred while recording data description to or playing data from a P2 card Recording
250. perates in 1080 1080 interlace mode 720 720 progressive mode 480 480 interlace mode 576 576 interlace mode 2 Camera mode This indicates the video system when signals output from CCD are recorded on a P2 card or output as video signals 60i 1080 59 94i or 480 59 94i 30P 1080 29 97P 720 29 97P or 480 29 97P 24P 1080 23 98P 720 23 98P or 480 23 98P 2 3 Pull down 24PA 1080 23 98P or 480 23 98P 2 3 3 2 Pull down 50i 1080 50i or 576 50i 25P 1080 25P 720 25P or 576 25P 60P 720 59 94P 50P 720 50P 3 REC mode This indicates the recording mode DVCPRO HD DVCPRO50 DVCPRO DV 4 Shutter speed mode 1 This indicates that the shutter speed is set to SYNCHRO SCAN 1 60 1 100 1 2000 HALF This indicates that a fixed shutter speed has been set 5 P2 card remaining xxkxM N The indication gt gt min stays illuminated under normal conditions or free space blinks when the remaining level is near zero END When the card space is used up END blinks WP The P2 card is write protected LOOP The camera recorder is in LOOP REC mode When loop recording cannot be performed for example because the P2 card has no free space the indication blinks INFO P2 P2 card being recognised x Total free space capacities of the P2 cards when MODE CHECK is being performed Note When the menu option P2 CARD REMAIN is set to ONE CARD the number of the P2 card slot that contains the target card is indicate
251. play refer to 30 PRE RECORDING indication SD memory card remaining free space when MODE CHECK is being performed page 67 in Viewfinder Status Indication Layout Immediately after the power is turned on the menu option PRE REC TIME is selected and or the storage duration is changed the content in internal memory will be undefined In these situations the video or sound will not be recorded for the duration specified even if either the REC START STOP button REC button on the handle or VTR button at the lens is pressed to start recording A P2 card that has been just inserted takes some time to recognise In this situation video or sound may not be recorded for the duration specified even if either the REC START STOP button REC button on the handle or VTR button at the lens is pressed to start a recording The internal memory does not store video or sound when a playback or recording review is being performed For this reason no video or sound can be recorded during such operation When recording starts the time code indication TCG may be shown as HOLD until the P2 card has been recognised During recording of IEEE1394 PRE RECORDING is not available Loop Recording When two or more P2 card slots contain cards this function allows the target P2 card to be switched in order Even when the free space of a P2 card is used up this function continues recording while erasing existing data To use th
252. playback of the clip under the pointer subsequent clips are played back in order according to when they were shot The thumbnail screen returns after the last clip has been played back Notes When playing back clips it is not necessary to select the clips blue frames around the thumbnails Clips with clip numbers displayed in red cannot be played During playback pressing the REW button starts 4x speed reverse playback and the FF button starts 4x speed fast playback Press the PLAY PAUSE button to return to normal playback During clip playback pressing the PLAY PAUSE button will temporarily stop pause the process During a pause pressing the REW button moves the pause position to the beginning of the clip Pressing the REW button again moves the pause position to the beginning of the previous clip During a pause pressing the FF button moves the pause position to the beginning of the next clip 6 Pressing the STOP button during clip playback stops the playback and returns the display to the thumbnail screen Note When playback is stopped the position of the pointer remains on the clip that was being played back regardless of where the playback started However when the THUMBNAIL button is pressed to close the thumbnail screen the pointer will move to the starting clip i e the clip with the earliest recording date and time not the clip on which the pointer was last positioned 2L
253. played or 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button NORMAL 4 x 3 thumbnails displayed can be The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor selected The factory default value is NORMAL THUMBNAIL INIT 2 Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and select Return the above thumbnail display settings to THUMBNAIL gt SETUP from thethumbnail menu default Move the cursor to this option and press the The following screen appears SET button Select YES when the confirmation LLE screen is displayed EXIT ALL HIDE Returns to the previous menu ALL CLIP SAME FORN SELECTED MARKED CL DATA DISPLAY DATE FORMAT THUMBNAIL SIZE gt THUMBNAIL INIT TEXT MEMC SLOT CLIPS ALL HIDE ON All indicators are not displayed OFF Indication No indication will be set depending on the following menu The factory settings are as follows MARKER IND Switches the shot mark marker between indication and no indication ON OFF The factory setting is ON indication TEXT MEMO IND Switches the text memo marker between indication and no indication ON OFF The factory setting is ON indication WIDE IND Switches the wide marker between indication and no indication ON OFF The factory setting is ON indication PROXY IND Switches the proxy marker between indication and no indication ON OFF The factory setting is ON indication DATA DISPLAY The time display field of the clip offers a choice of Time Code
254. ption UB o o o2 o3 04 o5 Los 23 oe 5 6 27 28 28 MODE to USER Image Notes an COLE EAE AE E Acc Boel ColCeDo DelAo Ae Bo BelBo Ce Co CeDolDe When the TCG switch is positioned at SET thumbnails cannot be manipulated Sequence No To confirm VICT UB press the HOLD switch to PoTit2z13s 74 sJol ij 3 4 o0 1 2 3 4 display VTCG on the display window Updated frame information 110 10 01 00 10 f 10 10 00 10 10 10 I 01 00 10 Retaining the user bits Frame rate 30P Over 60i 2 2 The data set for the user bits are automatically saved and 25P Over 50i 2 2 retained even if the camera recorder is turned off Time code frame digit oo 01 02 Frame rate information recorded in user bits Image If video information to be recorded based on the frame rate marenn set through the menu option CAMERA MODE is recorded in the user bits it can be edited with editing tools e g PC editing software In 1080i and SD mode the frame rate CEEE information for the user bits recorded in the VIDEO AUX area are used In 720P mode the video information is also recorded in the sub code area because the frame rate information for the user bits recorded in the sub code area is also used Updated frame information 5Q Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting Time Data For 720P Frame rate 24P O
255. range OUTPUT ITEM MENU Set the characters to be ONLY TC STATUS superimposed on the output signals from the VIDEO OUT connector MENU ONLY The menu screen is superimposed only when the menu is accessed This normally displays nothing TC Time codes are superimposed when the menu is accessed the menu screen is superimposed STATUS The characters that are the same as the characters superimposed in the viewfinder screen are superimposed When the menu is accessed the menu screen is superimposed 72 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Selection of video output signals a Settings of signals output from MON OUT connector The MON OUT connector outputs down converted analog signals Set the video signals output from the MON OUT connector by using the MONITOR OUT item on the menu lt OUTPUT SEL gt screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page Item Variable Remarks range MONITOR OUT VBS Set video signals output from the VF MON OUT connector Y VBS Analog composite signals are output VF Y signals to be output to the viewfinder is output The status screen is also superimposed Y Analog HD Y signals are output Set to superimpose characters to the VBS signals output from the MON OUT connector in the MONITOR OUT CHARA item of the menu lt OUTPUT SEL gt screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page Variable Item Remarks range MONITOR OUT ON Superimpose characters on the VBS
256. rd formatted condition available memory capacity etc From the thumbnail menu select PROPERTY DEVICES SD CARD If the format is compatible with SD standards the message SD STANDARD SUPPORTED is displayed If the format is not compatible with SD standards the message SD STANDARD NOT SUPPORTED is displayed If this is the case writing or reading will not be successful Format the card with the AJ HPX2000 For more on formatting SD memory cards see Formatting SD memory cards page 113 I Video Encoder Card Status Display optional ALL Ba DE aY 2 03 THUMBNAIL az CLIP PROPERTY OPERATION SD CARD CARD STATUS PROPERTY gt EXIT DEVICES G META DATA 7 PROPERTY SETUP gt i HDD gt foh EXIT 00 00 45 12 00 09 44 03 00 00 00 00 EXIT Attaching the video encoder card AJ YAX800G optional select PROPERTY DEVICES PROXY from the thumbnail menu The number of the slot in which the video encoder card is inserted is displayed Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Properties 117 Connection with external device Connection through the DVCPRO DV connector F Records of signals input to the DVCPRO DV connector 1 Refer to 32 DVCPRO DV connector page 20 to connect the 1394 cable DV cable Ensure that the signal format of the target device agrees with that of the camera recorder 2 Open the lt 1394 SETTING gt on the SY
257. rded video is compressed through a component digital recording method that uses a state of the art compression technology and sound is recorded using the non compression PCM recording method which excels in such areas as S N ratio frequency bands waveform properties and reproducibility of fine areas These methods further enhance the quality of images and sound In SD mode you can select a recording format appropri ate for your purpose For example choose DVCPRO50 to give higher priority to image quality or DVCPRO if cost efficiency is a high priority DV format is also sup ported Note When the clip is played back in the format not selected on the menu the picture may be disturbed until the for mat is detected H 4 channel Digital Audio Recording all formats In HD 1080i or 720P mode 4 channel digital audio recording is used All formats in SD mode DVCPRO DV and DVCPROS5O also support 4 channel digital audio recording with high quality sound 48 kHz 16 bits i Clip Thumbnailing Automatic generation of thumbnails AJ HPX2000 automatically generates a thumbnail for each recording cut clip It is possible to make use of this on the camera recorder as well as for non linear editing purposes and after uploading to a server Thumbnail display on the LCD monitor The 3 5 inch color LCD side of the your video camera recorder can provide a multi screen view of 12 clip thumbnails You can choose a desired clip
258. rding Viewfinder Screen Status Displays Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor Using the LCD Monitor 1 Turn on the POWER switch of the unit 2 Slide the OPEN button in the arrow direction to open the LCD monitor in the arrow direction 3 Adjust the angle of the LCD monitor for most convenient viewing The monitor can turn up to 180 degrees towards the lens and up to 90 degrees towards you Note To prevent camera recorder failure do not allow undue force to be applied to the monitor when it is open 4 The options BRIGHTNESS COLOR LEVEL and CONTRAST show respectively the brightness color level and contrast of the screen These options can be found in the lt LCD MONITOR gt screen which is accessible from the SYSTEM SETTING page lt LCD MONITOR gt BRIGHTNESS 4 0 COLOR LEVEL 0 CONTRAST 0 BACKLIGHT NORMAL SELF SHOOT MIRROR 5 Through the menu option LCD MON CHAR specify whether or not the LCD should display the same characters as the viewfinder This menu option can be found in the lt OUTPUT SEL gt screen which is accessible from the SYSTEM SETTING page lt OUTPUT SEL gt OUTPUT ITEM MENU ONLY MONITOR OUT VBS MONITOR OUT CHAR OFF LCD MON CHAR ON VF MODE MEM THUMBNAIL OUT OFF Notes When closing the LCD monitor make sure that it is shut tight in an environment with sudden temperature changes condensation ma
259. rding continues Warning tone Beeps 4 times per second while recording continues Warning The P2 cards are recorded to maximum description capacity Recording playback The recording stops operation Delete the clips in the P2 card or insert a Countermeasures new P2 card Warning This error indicates poor wireless audio description reception conditions Recording Continues to operate without receiving the playback i A wireless microphone signal operation Countermeas re Check the microphone power supply and the 6 Recording Error reception status of the wireless receiver 8 1394 Error Display window indication 00 00 00 11 appears in the time code display field Even after recording is stopped this display continues to blink until the next operation is performed Display window indication The 1394 E indicator in the display window blinks For more information see 1394 Error Codes page 136 WARNING lamp Blinks 4 times per second while recording continues WARNING lamp Blinks 4 times per second while the WARNING lamp recording is continuing Tally lamp Blinks 4 times per second while recording continues Blinks 4 times per second while the TALLY Viewfinder The REC WARNING indicator lights up Warning tone Beeps 4 times per second while recording continues Taly lamp LAMP recording is continu
260. re flat by combining the sawtooth shaped waveform and the parabola waveform when watching the respective waveforms of R G and B of the video signals White shading adjustment is disabled when the DS GAIN is turned ON or the LINE MIX GAIN function operates Adjust the white shading in the following manner after turning OFF the DS GAIN and releasing the LINE MIX GAIN function Note Coloring may occur in the vertical direction near where the lens aperture is open even when the white shading has been adjusted This is something that is inherent to lenses and optical systems and is therefore not indicative of a failure or malfunctioning 1 Attach the lens to the camera At this stage do not forget to connect the lens cable 2 Set the electronic shutter to OFF and the gain to L 0 dB 3 If the extender is attached to the lens release the extender function 4 Perform a menu operation to open the VF DISPLAY screen from the VF page check that the settings selected for the ZEBRA1 DETECT item ZEBRA2 DETECT item and ZEBRA2 item match the settings shown in the figure below If they differ make the appropriate changes and then close the menu screen a lt VF DISPLAY gt DISP CONDITION NORMAL DISP MODE 3 VF OUT cY VF DTL 3 ZEBRA1 DETECT 070 ZEBRA2 DETECT 085 ZEBRA2 SPOT LOW LIGHT LVL 35 RC MENU DISP SUFF 50M INDICATOR OFF MARKER CHAR LVL 150 C Q Set the ZEBRA switch on the viewfi
261. re removing the battery pack in order to keep the time code generator energised If the battery pack is removed first there is no guarantee that the time code will stay externally locked External synchronisation of the camera when the time code is externally locked When the time code is externally locked the reference video signals input through the GENLOCK IN connector gen lock the camera Notes To externally lock the unit as the master device with more than one unit the mode must be the same as that of the camera Note that in a system using both interlaced and progressive scanning there may be breaks in the video and time code When using the MON OUT or VIDEO OUT connector to output reference signals position the OUTPUT SEL switch on the side panel at CAM Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting Time Data Adjustments and Settings for Recording 57 a Providing an ID to the Camera The camera ID is specified through the lt CAMERA ID gt screen 9 To exit the menu press the MENU button The ID can include up to 10 alphanumeric characters symbols and or spaces Notes When the menu option CAMERA ID is set to BAR Note the camera ID is recorded together with color bar When the settings menu is displayed outputting color bar signals signals does not indicate the camera ID This menu option is accessible from the lt VF INDICATOR1 gt screen which is accessible from the T Goto
262. recorded in a clip on a P2 card The camera recorder includes only one user defined value If user defined values are selected for both the UB and VITC UB then the same value is used Types of UB can be selected in UB MODE and types of VITCUB can be selected in VITC UB respectively However in the following cases these are fixed to the frame rate information of the editing machines editing software for PCs In 720P mode both the UB and VITC UB are always frame rate information For 24P 24PA shooting in 1080i or 480i mode the VITC UB is always frame rate information Date and time real time The built in clock maintains the date and time When the GPS unit AJ GPS900G is installed the built in clock is corrected with accurate date and time information from the GPS This clock is used to store the date and time while the power is turned off and as the time for the user bits and date data as well as the reference for file generation times during clip recording which determine the sorting order of thumbnails and the order of playback It is also used to generate clip metadata and UMIDs Unique Material Identifiers in the VIDEO AUX area 48 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting Time Data CTL counter The CTL counter will measure total recording time after resetting in the recording operation On the other hand this value is the count time and sets the start point of a clip that can be played back This can be used
263. remaining capacity 116 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Properties From the thumbnail menu select PROPERTY gt CARD STATUS The following screen appears When REMAIN is selected When USED is selected 1 2 96 100 NO CARD NO CARD Write protect Mark The A mark appears if the P2 card is write protected P2 Card Status used memory capacity The used memory capacity of the P2 card is indicated by a bar graph and a percentage figure The bar graph indicator moves to the right as the used memory capacity increases The following indications may appear depending on the card status FORMAT ERROR An unformatted P2 card is inserted NOT SUPPORTED An unsupported card is inserted in the camera NO CARD P2 cards are not inserted To check unique information such as serial number or user ID move the cursor to the desired P2 card and press the SET button P2 Card memory capacity Total Capacity Displays the used memory capacity on a P2 card and the total capacity in minutes Because fractions are truncated the figure shown for used memory capacity on a P2 card may differ from the figure for total capacity The used memory capacity of a write protected P2 card is displayed as 100 Total used memory capacity for all slots Displays the total used memory capacity for all 5 slots B SD memory card Status Display The status display enables a confirmation of the SD memory ca
264. rlace mode in 60 fields This processes video signals of the same time into the odd field and The SD SDI output is maintained The time code user bits and UMID selectable between ON and OFF are output The EDH selectable between ON and OFF and UMID selectable between ON and OFF are output the even field and records them on tape as video signals in the respective fields 30P Over 60P This operates in the progressive mode in 60 frames This outputs the same video signals as video signals for 2 frames and records them on tape The time code Adjustments and Settings for Recording Multi Format Adjustments and Settings for Recording 37 Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance To record high quality video with the unit the black and white balances must be adjusted according to conditions For higher quality it is recommended that the adjustments should be made in this order AWB white balance adjustment ABB black balance adjustment gt AWB white balance adjustment Adjusting the White Balance Whenever light conditions change the white balance must be re adjusted To adjust the white balance follow the steps below 1 Set the switches as illustrated below CC ND FILTER control WHITE BAL A or B OUTPUT CAM AUTO W B BAL switch GAIN Under normal conditions set to 0 dB Used to perform If it is too dark an appropriate gain AWB should be set 2 Adjust the CC ND FILTER control
265. rong external force as this may damage the connector When error code 1394 E 92 1394 INITIAL ERROR appears disconnect the connecting cables and re connect them or turn off the camera recorder s power and turn it back on Ensure that the unit and all of the connected devices are each grounded or connected to a common ground before use If it is not possible to ground the unit and devices turn off the power of the unit and of all the connected devices before connecting or disconnecting the IEEE1394 cable When the unit is to be connected to a device equipped with a 4 pin type of connector connect the unit s connector 6 pin type first When connecting the unit with a PC equipped with a 6 pin type ofconnector connect the 1394 cable as dictated by the shapes of the 1394 connectors Bear in mind that 4 pin type inserting a plug the wrong way round may damage the unit REMOTE remote control connector The remote control unit AJ RC10G accessory is connected here optional OPTION SLOT Attach the video encoder card AJ YAX800G optional For information about the installation and proxy recording see the AJ YAX800G_ instruction manual 35 SD memory card insertion slot An SD memory card optional accessory is inserted here It is used for metadata upload and proxy recording optional lt Cautions in using SD memory cards gt Insert an SD memory card which is compliant with the SD card standard in
266. ry card as card files under a single title A total of eight titles can be saved on an SD memory card Furthermore the eight lens files saved under one title on an SD memory card can be loaded into the unit s internal memory The correlation between the lens files stored in the internal memory and lens files saved on an SD memory card is shown below Internal memory S UP to8sets of the lens file 8 lens files can be stored in the built in memory NI The contents of 8 lens files can be saved onto an SD memory card as card files under one title or they can be loaded from the SD Card files memory card Title 1 Title 2 Title 3 Title 4 oD O NI N NX N Title 5 Title 6 Title 7 Title 8 O Awe J A total of 64 lens files 8 lens files x 8 titles can be saved on an SD memory card 86 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data Saving lens files on the SD memory card Select the card file No 1 Using menu operations open the lt LENS FILE CARD R W gt screen from the FILE page When the message FORMAT ERROR appears in the upper right corner format the SD memory card with the camera recorder SD cards can be formatted through the CARD CONFIG menu option on the READ WRITE screen For more in
267. s 8 To exit the menu press the MENU button Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling data Adjustments and Settings for Recording 81 To title settings data for scene files 1 Navigate the menu to the lt SCENE gt screen 2 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option TITLE 1 4 for the appropriate scene file lt SCENE gt READ USER DATA SCENE SEL al READ WRITE RESET SS CET LED oe Fee Pee TITLED teteeeee TITLE3 teteeeee TITLES ttt a 3 Press the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the title entry area putting the unit in entry mode lt SCENE gt READ USER DATA SCENE SEL cea READ WRITE RESET l TITLE o eooo TITLE2 TITLES TITLE4 TERETERE TEETER TEETER 4 Turn the JOG dial button until a desired character appears The characters that appear are switched in the following order Space o v Alphabetical characters A to Z v Numerals 0to9 v Symbols gt lt 5 Press the JOG dial button to accept a desired character 6 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the next digit clockwise and repeat Steps 4 5 to set characters up to eight characters 7 When the title is set turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to 8 Press the JOG dial button to return the cursor to the options TITLE 1 4 9 Turn the JOG dial button to return the cursor to the option WRITE 82 Adj
268. s paused the start of the next clip is located in pause mode PLAY PAUSE button This button is used to view playback using the viewfinder screen or a color video monitor The lamp comes on when playback starts In playback mode this button pauses PLAY PAUSE playback with the lamp blinking REC button Pressing this button starts recording and pressing again stops recording This button has the same function as 11 the REC START STOP button and the VTR button at the lens It may be disabled with 25 the recording protection button REC protection button This button disables 24 the REC button on the handle ON The REC button is enabled OFF The REC button is disabled P2 CARD ACCESS LED This LED indicates the recording and playback status of each card Slide lock button Used to open the slide out door for inserting P2 cards While depressing this button slide the door to the left USB 2 0 connector DEVICE USB 2 0 connector HOST A USB 2 0 cable is connected here When the menu option PC MODE is set to ON data can be transferred via USB 2 0 During such data transfer recording playback or operations of clips is permitted The menu option PC MODE is found in the SYSTEM MODE screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page For more information see Connection with external devices using the USB 2 0 port page 120 30 GENLOCK IN connector 31 Used to input an HD Y signal when GENLOCKing the camera or ext
269. sed to select the recording format for the SD mode 480i or 576i DVCPRO50 The DVCPROS50 format 50 Mbps is used to record video DVCPRO The DVCPRO format 25 Mbps is used to record video DV The DV format is used to record video ASPECT menu option Used to select the aspect ratio for the SD mode 480i or 576i 16 9 The 16 9 aspect ratio is used to record video 4 3 The 4 3 aspect ratio is used to record video ia Recording formats and output connector signal formats The table below shows the formats used to record signals from the CCD and externally input signals along with the formats for signals output from the output connectors Menu setting Recording Output VIDEO OUT P2 card VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT VBS SYSTEM REC CAMERA REC Recording i connector HD connector SD oe When nE When W recording an connector connector MODE SIGNAL MODE MODE output frame g SDI 2 sDI REMOTE is set to is set to item item item item mode connectors HDVF SD VF Video Sound Video Sound Video Sound Video 60i 60i 30P 30P Over 60i CAM 24P 24P Over 60i 4ch 2 3 Pull down No sound 1080 59 94i APA 24P Over 60i 10801 4ch 1080i on 525i 4ch 525i 1080i 525i 2 3 3 2 Pull down Channels 5 1394
270. select options to add to USER MENU Only the selected options are displayed as options in USER MENU For information about how to navigate this menu see Setting Menu Options page 139 lt USER MENU SELECT gt SELECT MODE SYSTEM SETTING PAINT VF CAM OPERATION MAIN OPERATION FILE MAINTENANCE Note Options with are effective The number of options that can be added to USER MENU is 14 x 3 42 three pages of options for camera related options and 14 one page of options for memory related options 140 Menu Menu Configuration Menu Description Tables E SYSTEM SETTING SYSTEM MODE Items Adjustable R inarks Items Adjustable Remarka Data Saved Range Data Saved Range SYSTEM 1080 59 94i For setting the system frequency and the VF TYPE HD Specify the type of viewfinder to be MODE 1080 50i recording format of the unit SD attached to the camera recorder 720 59 94P When this item is switched turn OFF Ic UIFIR 720 50P_ _ the POWER switch on the unit and then RECMODE DYCPROS Select the recording mode In SD mode 480 59 941 turn it ON again DVCPRO only 576 50 Notes DV DVCPRO50 When the remote control unit AJ Record in DVCPRO50 format RC10G is connected this item is not DVCPRO isplayed 3 4 ann this item operate the main Recordin DYGPRO onma ae C U FIR DV Record
271. some coloring phenomena may occur on images in very bright sections In order to suppress the coloring phenomena switch the OUTPUT AUTO KNEE switch to CAM AUTO KNEE OFF set the MANUAL item on the KNEE LEVEL screen to ON and then set a smaller value for the KNEE SLOPE item on the KNEE LEVEL screen After executing these settings confirm that there are no coloring phenomena and then start shooting MID SETTING HIGH SETTING Items _ Adjustable Remarks Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range mMASTER 3dB Select the master gain from 3 0 3 6 mMASTER 3dB Select the master gain from 3 0 3 6 GAIN 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 or 300B GAIN 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 or 30dB 6dB 12dB s C U F R 3008 S C U F R 3008 H DTL LEVEL 00 For performing the horizontal detail H DTL LEVEL 00 For performing the horizontal detail g correction level setting is correction level setting S C U F R 63 s c u F R 63 V DTL LEVEL 00 For performing the vertical detail V DTL LEVEL 00 For performing the vertical detail i correction level setting is correction level setting s c
272. t copied only thumbnails clip metadata icons Voice Memo proxy and real time metadata When there is insufficient recording capacity on the destination the message LACK OF REC CAPACITY is displayed and copying will not proceed When clips to be copied include some with defects the message CANNOT ACCESS is displayed and copying will not proceed If selected clips include any that are already recorded on the destination P2 card copying will not proceed To stop copying press the SET button Clips currently being copied to the destination will be deleted When identical clips exist on the destination card the OVERWRITE is displayed Select YES or NO 1 Regarding SD memory cards to be used see lt Cautions in using SD memory cards gt page 20 108 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails Reconnection of Incomplete Clips Setting of Clip Meta Data Information such as the name of person who shot the video the name of the reporter the shooting location or a text memo can be read from the SD memory card and can be recorded as Clip Meta Data Reading Clip Meta Data metadata upload 1 Insert the SD memory card that contains the Clip Meta Data metadata upload file 2 Press the THUMBNAIL button The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor Note Press the thumbnail button while pressing MODE CHECK button when a thumbnail is displayed to move to Step 4 3 Press the THUMBNAI
273. t Interference available from FCC local regional offices helpful FCC Warning To assure continued FCC emission limit compliance the user must use only shielded interface cables when connecting to host computer or peripheral devices Also any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment could void the user s authority to operate this device Declaration of Conformity Model Number AJ HPX2000P AJ HPX2100E Trade Name PANASONIC Responsible Party Panasonic Corporation of North America One Panasonic Way Secaucus NJ 07094 Panasonic Broadcast amp Television Systems Company 1 800 524 1448 This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation To assure continued compliance follow the attached installation instructions and do not make any unauthorized modifications Support contact CAUTIONS TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD REFER MOUNTING OF OPTIONAL INTERFACE BOARDS TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL indicates safety information A rechargeable battery that is recyclable powers the product you have purchased lt For USA California Only gt This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material special han
274. t affect the signal output from the camera Parts and their Functions These are factory set to 0 dB for L 6 dB for M and 12 9 MARKER SELECT button dB for H This button selects the marker information indicated on the viewfinder screen It switches between two 6 OUTPUT AUTO KNEE selector switch marker information indications which can be selected Used to select the video signals sent from the camera using a menu option Pressing this button once unit to the memory viewfinder and video monitor switches the indicated marker information from A CAM AUTO KNEE ON e a a e ite again Video being recorded through the camera is sent Seti i se mar er en A pone with the auto knee circuit activated ae ties ast selected indication before power A w It is also possible to assign the DRS Dynamic Range aed function pee of the pas KNEE g For more information see Marker Check Screen fu ctio Displays MARKER SELECT button function page CAM AUTO KNEE OFF 00 Video being recorded through the camera is sent in mantial knes mod 10 SYNCHRO SCAN ADJUSTMENT buttons l BARS These buttons are enabled when the 3 shutter switch Color bar signal is output The auto knee circuit does is positioned at ON and synchro scan is selected They are used to adjust the speed of the synchro not work You can select between four types of color bar signal Sgan l For more information see SW MODE page 160 The button decreases shutter speed th
275. t in menu option on the MIC AUDIO the GENLOCK IN connector Only for screen on the MAIN OPERATION 1080 59 94i 1080 50i 720 59 94P or page is set to 2CH Pen Output of playback data recorded as A 2 ch io signals For locking the HD SDI signals to the CjU F cnanne ucio signas GENLOCK input 1394 SPEED S100 For setting the transfer rate of signals For the down converter output S200 output from the DVCPRO DV connector signals the start position of the video 5400 S100 100Mbps delays by about 90 lines S200 200Mbps COMPFOSIT lelulF 400 400Mbps For locking the down converter output signals to the GENLOCK input 1394INCH J0 For setting the input channel of signals For the HD SDI output signals the input to the DYVCPRO DV connector start position of the video gains by 63 0 63 To fix to the designated value IC U FIR about 90 lines AUTO AUTO To follow the settings of the HPHASE __ 100 Perform coarse phase adjustment for c u F externally connected devices COARSE 5000 horizontal hold when configuring a 1394 OUT CH 0 For setting the input channel of signals faa system output from the DVCPRO DV connector 100 63 0 63 To fix to the designated value HPHASE 100 Perform fine phase adjustment for AUTO AUTO To follow the settings of the FINE od horizontal hold when configuring a C U F externally connected devices a system 1394 OFF For setting the control for recording 100 CONTROL BOTH start sto
276. t the information items you want to have displayed in the viewfinder screen go to the lt VF INDICATOR1 gt and lt VF INDICATOR2 gt screens from the VF page and turn on or off the appropriate options or specify desired values For directions on setting the options see Setting Menu Options page 139 gt lt VE INDICATORI gt EXTENDER ON SHUTTER ON FILTER ON WHITE ON GAIN ON IRIS S IRIS CAMERA ID BAR ID POSITION UPPER L DATE TIME OFF ZOOM LVL ON COLOR TEMP ON CAMERA MODE ON lt VF INDICATOR2 gt P2CARD REMAIN BATTERY AUDIO LVL TC SYSTEM INFO SAVE LED DV VOICE MEMO REC STATUS PROXY REC ON ON ON OFF NORMAL SYSTEM INFO CANCEL SAVE ON ON OFF OFF E Viewfinder Status Indication Layout The indications are arranged as illustrated below 4 6 5 _ am ere a aa EEA 4 6v gt 1 1080 41 249 8 HD atals ee aE GAIN USER SW SRN LOW 0 S GAIN 30 36 fot MID 12 HIGH 18 DS GAIN 6171017127 4154 7201 J i 1H Nes aa 3 0GB U U1 AUDIO CH1 U2 15 Dz7x4 REC WARNING 16 TCG 00 00 00 175 18 21 22 23 20 For more information see the following pages 62 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder Screen Status Displays Information Item Indication Status 1 System mode This indicates the mode that the unit o
277. tatus or p2 Card Stays on in ACTIVE Writing and reading green enabled Stays on in ACTIVE Writing and reading orange enabled The card is recordable loop recording also enabled Blinks in orange ACCESSING Writing or reading being performed Blinks rapidly in INFO READING Recognaising the P2 card orange Blinks slowly in FULL The P2 card has no free green space Only reading is enabled PROTECTED The write protect switch on the P2 card is positioned at PROTECT Only reading is enabled Stays off NOT The card is not supported SUPPORTED by your unit Replace the card FORMAT ERROR The P2 card is not properly formatted Reformat the card NO CARD No P2 card is inserted The mode check indication is shown in the viewfinder For more information see Viewfinder Status Indication Layout page 62 The access LED located on the display window blinks when reading or writing data from or to any of the P2 cards inserted in Slots 1 5 or stays illuminated when any of the cards are recordable It stays off when none of the P2 cards are recordable Recording and Playback P2 Cards Recording and Playback 29 Basic Procedures This section describes the basic procedure for shooting and recording Before you embark on a shoot pre inspect your system to ensure that it works properly For directions on inspecting your memory card camera recorder see Inspections Before Shooting page 126 Batter
278. tem information warning area in the viewfinder When the connection is not correctly established both of these indications blink Y ab eel So ZU 2 U EEH AD z Q 5 USB LED 3 r Q Fs j 0 a sliil eh bea e245 ee lt a USB DEVICE 6t F iil g jb A 1 8dB F 2 g 3 There are two ways to terminate the USB mode as follows Turn the POWER switch of AJ HPX2000 OFF Set the PC MODE item to OFF from the menu operations 1 20 Connection with external device Connection with external devices using the USB 2 0 port E USB HOST mode AJ HPX2000 can be connected to a hard disc drive that supports USB 2 0 to store data from cards on it view thumbnails for stored clips and write data back to P2 cards E Switching to the USB HOST mode Notes When copying data a hard disc drive must have sufficient free space Do not connect more than one drive even through a hub or any other device 1 By navigating the menu set the PC MODE SELECT menu option on the SYSTEM MODE screen to USB HOST then the PC MODE option to ON This will place the camera recorder in USB HOST mode When the camera recorder is in USB HOST mode the viewfinder indicates USB HOST and the USB LED on the side panel stays illuminated If the hard disc drive is not properly connected then the LED blinks When a user button is assigned the PC MODE on off switching
279. the lt CAMERA ID gt screen from the CAM VF page OPERATION page The ID POSITION menu option can be used to P select a position where the camera ID is R CAMERA ULD superimposed on the color bar The ID POSITION option can be accessed through the VF INDICATOR 1 screen on the VF page When the TIME DATE menu option is set to ON the camera ID along with the data and time information are superimposed on the color bar The TIME DATE option can be accessed through the VF INDICATOR 1 screen on the VF page ID1 ABCDEFGHIJ ID2 ABCDEFGHIJ ID3 ABCDEFGHIJ 2 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to options ID1 ID3 3 Press the JOG dial button The cursor moves to the ID entry area allowing you to enter an ID 4 Turn the JOG dial button until a desired character appears The characters that appear are switched in the following order Space oO Y Alphabetical characters A to Z Y Numerals 0to9 v Symbols gt lt 5 Press the JOG dial button to accept a desired character 6 Turn the JOG dial button to move cursor to the next digit clockwise and repeat Steps 4 5 to set characters To change an input character turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow cursor to the appropriate character and carry out steps 4 and 5 7 When all the characters are set turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to 8 Pressing the JOG dial button brings the cursor back to the options
280. the appropriate slot indicates the status of the P2 card For how the P2 card status is indicated see P2 CARD ACCESS LED and status of P2 cards page 29 6 Close the slide out door Note Do not leave the slide out door open when moving camera recorder 28 Recording and Playback P2 Cards Removing P2 Cards 1 While pressing down the slide lock button move the slide out door to the left The door opens 2 Tilt down the EJECT button 3 Then depress the EJECT button to release the P2 card so that you can remove it Tilt down the EJECT button Depress the tilted down EJECT button to release the P2 card Notes After insertion do not remove the P2 card while it is being accessed or recognized the P2 card access LED flashes orange or the P2 card may fail If your unit is not set to turn on the P2 CARD ACCESS LED before removing the card ensure that pre recording and or voice memo recording have finished the P REC indication has stopped blinking and the V mark or VOICE REC indication on the viewfinder screen has turned off after stopping recording or playback If a P2 card being accessed is removed the viewfinder displays TURN POWER OFF and camera recorder gives a warning using an alarm and the WARNING LED In addition all P2 CARD ACCESS LEDs blink rapidly in green If this is the case turn the power off For more information on warning in
281. the last character is set press the JOG dial button to bring the cursor back to the option USER 8 To exit the menu press the MENU button Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting Time Data Adjustments and Settings for Recording 59 E CTL Count Setting and Display By setting the DISPLAY switch to CTL CTL count is displayed on the time count indication of the LCD display window The CTL count is displayed in 12 hours with non drop frame The playback order of clips recorded on a P2 card is not linear as for VTRs It is organized according to thumbnail operations or exchanging P2 cards and the priority of recorded clips will be altered Therefore different CTL counts are displayed for recording mode and playback mode respectively CTL count for recording mode recording CTL Recording CTL count is displayed during recording mode REC REC PAUSE STOP and REC REVIEW and the count continues from the end point of the previous recording Recording CTL count is retained even if the power is turned off When the power is next turned on the count continues from the previous value Note If the RESET button is pressed while the recording CTL count is being displayed only the recording CTL count is reset Note that reset is disabled during the REC REVIEW operation CTL count for the playback mode playback CTL During playback mode PLAY FF REW PLAY PAUSE playback CTL count is displayed
282. this is the case power must be supplied in a different way a Viewing hard disc drive information You can view the information on the hard disc drive connected via USB 2 0 with the following steps 1 Switch the mode to USB HOST For more information see Switching to the USB HOST mode page 121 2 Connect the hard disc drive to the camera recorder via USB 2 0 3 Press the thumbnail button to display the thumbnail screen 4 Press the MENU button and select HDD gt EXPLORE from the thumbnail menu The screen provides the information about the hard disc drive Connection with external device Connection with external device Connection with external devices using the USB 2 0 port 121 For Type S or P2 STORE 1 PARTITION 7 8 9 This section indicates the type of the hard disc drive The available functions depend on the type of hard HDD EXPLORE IE disc drive NO MODEL DATE TIME aoe HDD type Feature Available functions PARTITION TYPE S cent z P orena osmio aa TYPES A special format that Thumbnail viewing Panasonic 4 AJ P2CO04HG 2006 SEP 09 14 48 allows high speed writ writing and writing back MODEL 5 AJ P2C004HG 2006 SEP 09 14 52 ing and writing back on jon a card basis writing xx012345 s PEA RSENS ce a card by card basis A back ona clip basis and SIZE 232 8 GB 8 AJ P2C004HG 2006 SEP 20 23 11 drive formatted with the formatting USED 31 5 GB camera recorder us
283. tion of A or GET B which is selected in the SKIN TONE TABLE item near the center marker When this function is executed data from CENTER to Q PHASE are fetched automatically The fetched data will be the table data of A or B which is selected in the SKIN TONE TABLE item It is impossible to obtain color information of both A and B at the same s U FIR time SKIN DTL 0 For setting the effect level of the skin CORING A tone detail s c u F R 7 Y MAX 000 For setting the maximum value of 190 brightness for enabling the skin tone C U F R 255 Y MIN 000 For setting the minimum value of 10 brightness for enabling the skin tone C U F R 255 CENTER 000 For setting the center position on the axis for setting an area that enables O35 skin tone s c U F R 255 WIDTH 000 For setting the area width for enabling the skin tone on the l axis of which the 055 center is the CENTER s c U F R 255 QWIDTH 00 For setting the area width for enabling A the skin tone on the Q axis of which the 10 center is the I CENTER s clulF R 90 Q PHASE 180 For setting phases of the area for enabling skin tone as setting the 000 standard to the Q axis s c u F R 179 Y MAX direction B Y Y MIN SKINTONE AREA gt Note The items indicated by are the setting items for PAINT MENU SW m R W in the lt SD CARD R W SELECT gt screen The items without are the setting items for PAINT MENU LEVEL
284. to camera recorder for use MultiMediaCard and SDHC memory cards cannot be used Bear in mind that taking pictures may no longer be possible if you do use them If you intend to use miniSD cards in camera recorder always install the adapter specially designed for miniSD cards The unit will not work properly if only the miniSD card adapter is installed Make sure that the card has been installed in the adapter before using it Use of Panasonic s SD memory cards and miniSD cards is recommended Be sure to format cards using camera recorder To format SD memory cards using a_ personal computer download the dedicated software from the support site SD memory cards with the following capacity 8MB 2GB can be used for camera recorder 8 MB 16 MB 32 MB 64 MB 128 MB 256 MB 512 MB 1GB 2 GB For proxy recording optional 256MB 512MB 1GB or 2 GB SD memory cards with High Speed indication should be used For the latest information not available in the operating Instructions visit the P2 Support Desk at the following Web sites https eww pavc panasonic co jp pro av The SDHC card conforms to a new standard for memory The SD card logo is a registered trademark MMC MultiMediaCard is a registered trademark of Infineon cards with a large capacity of more than 2 GB which was established by the SD Association in 2006 Technologies AG 36 BUSY operation mode display lamp
285. to each channel Maintenance and Inspections Maintenance and Inspections Inspections Before Shooting 127 6 Inspection of the clock time code and user bits 1 Set the user s bit as required Please refer to Setting of the user bits page 49 for the setting procedures 2 Set the time code Please refer to Setting the Time Code page 53 for the setting procedures Go Set the TCG switch to R RUN A Press the REC START STOP button Check that the counter display number changes as recording progresses 5 Press the REC START STOP button again Check that recording stops and the counter display number stops changing 6 Set the TCG switch to F RUN Check that the counter display number changes regardless of recording status 7 Set the DISPLAY switch to UB Each time the HOLD button is pressed make sure that the displayed value changes in the following sequence VTCG DATE TIME No display time zone gt TCG and also verify that the displayed value is correct If DATE TIME or time zone is not correct refer to Setting the Internal Clock s Date and Time page 52 for guidance on setting the correct values Note Note that date and time data set for DATE TIME and time zone is recorded in clips and affects the playback sequence etc at the time of thumbnail manipulations Maintenance E Cleaning Inside the Viewfinder Do not use thinner or other solvents to remov
286. to find the current playback position Camera ID The camera ID can be set with 10 characters x3 lines which can be superimposed on the color bar video It can be also superimposed along with date and time data a Recording time code and user bits i UB in VIDEO REC SIGNAL SYSTEM MODE CAMERA TC in sub code TC in VIDEO UB in sub code AUX area VITC MODE area AUX area VITC area UB 60l 50i As per the TC As per the TC As per the VITC 1080 59 94i 30P 25P mode mode 4 As per the UB UB mode 1080 50i Always non drop Always non drop mode Always frame rate 24P 24PA 5 5 i L a3 frame frame information 60P 50P As per the TC As per the TC CAM 720 59 94P 30P 25P mode mode 4 Always frame rate Always frame rate 720 50P 24P Always non drop Always non drop information 3 information 3 frame 5 frame 5 60l 50i As per the TC As per the TC As per the VITC 480 59 94i 30P 25P mode mode As per the UB UB mode 576 50 Always non drop Always non drop _ mode Always frame rate 24P 24PA B RR frame 5 frame information 1080 59 94i As per the UB As per the VITC 1080 50i mode UB mode SDI or VIDEO 720 59 94P Z As per the TC As per the TC Always frame rate Always frame rate 720 50P mode mode information information 480 59 94i As per the UB As per the VITC 576 50 mode UB mode 1394 As per the TC mode Regardless of the setting TC
287. to make adjustments in line with your diopter in order to obtain optimum clarity in the viewfinder image hl Used to attach or remove the viewfinder Parts and their Functions 0 k 15 Viewfinder left right position anchoring ring 16 Used to adjust the side to side position of the viewfinder Viewfinder front back position anchoring lever Used to adjust the fore and aft position of the viewfinder Note For more information see the instruction manual for the viewfinder Parts and their Functions Viewfinder 27 Recording and Playback P2 Cards Inserting P2 Cards amp insert a P2 card into the P2 card slot until the EJECT button pops up Note When using the camera recorder for the first time be sure to set the time data beforehand On how the time data is set see Setting Time Data page 48 1 p EJECT button Turn on the POWER switch The card must be inserted with the logo right way up Way _ Oo 4 Tilt up the popped up EJECT button to lock in the P2 Sy card POWER ON ae ae P2 CARD ACCESS 2 While pressing down the slide lock button slide the LED slide out door to the left The door opens X J i Slide lock 5 insert a P2 card into camera recorder The P2 CARD hy button ACCESS LED for
288. to the factory set values Pe Scene file User data Lens file Note T_T oI ole Black shading data Fora USB DEVICE mode errors occur seven Jithe WRITE USER Save the user preference menu data in respective items of LENS FILE CARD R W are executed DATA the camera s internal memory since it does not access an SD memory card Set PC a a Fa MODE to OFF and then execute the operation again Note 170 Menu Menu Description Tables For a USB DEVICE mode errors occur even if the READ FACTORY DATA item is executed since it does not access an SD memory card Set PC MODE to OFF and then execute the operation again The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode I MAINTENANCE SYSTEM CHECK LENS FILE ADJ Items Adjustable Remarks Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range COLOR ON ON OFF switching for checking proper RB GAIN ON ON The gains of Rch and Bch CHECK OFF operation of the camera recorder CTRL RESET OFF adjusted in lt RB GAIN The RGB level in the area around the CONTROL gt screen are reset center of the screen is indicated in the Furthermore the flare levels of viewfinder to show whether each signal Rch Gch and Bch that are is success
289. ts and Settings for Recording 71 Selection of video output signals The unit employs the VIDEO OUT connector and the MON OUT connector as connectors for outputting video signals E Settings of signals output from VIDEO OUT connector The signal modes for outputting signals from the VIDEO OUT connector are switched with the VIDEO OUT switch HD SDI To output the HD SDI signals When the camera recorder is set to the SD mode SD SDI signals are output SD SDI To output the SD SDI signals Signals are down converted in HD mode VBS To output the composite video signals Signals are down converted in HD mode aD VIDEO OUT switch oo D e988 oo FA The signals output from the MON OUT connector or VIDEO OUT connector are switched with the OUTPUT SEL switch However the switching operation is not acknowledged during the recording operation MEM During EE such as recording video images taken by the camera are output Meanwhile signals on the P2 card are output during playback CAM The camera images are output at all times OFF No signal is output from the VIDEO OUT or MON OUT connector a wal OUTPUT SEL switch A Set the characters to be superimposed on the signals output from the VIDEO OUT connector by using the VIDEO OUT CHARACTER switch and the OUTPUT ITEM item on the menu lt OUTPUT SEL gt screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page switch Item Variable Remarks
290. tting is switched to CAM the 15dBt x Select whether or not to enable 15 dB 1 TA Siris controiwilnotoperate for DS GAIN C U F R properly Enable IRIS GAIN 01 Set the adjustable value for IRIS GAIN IclulF R e Disable VALUE i This setting is effective when CAM is 20 dB t x Select whether or not to enable 20 dB 1 B selected for IRIS GAIN for DS GAIN C U F R 20 x Enable c u F R e Disable The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode Note When the DS GAIN function is active the shutter mode is set to OFF 162 Menu Menu Description Tables I MAIN OPERATION BATTERY P2CARD Items Adjustable Remarks Items Adjustable Remarks Data Saved Range Data Saved Range BATTERY PROPAC14 Select the battery to use Remaining CARD NEAR ON Select whether or not to set the alarm to SELECT TRIMPAC14 capacity detection is also performed END ALARM OFF beep for P2 CARD NEAR END ALARM HYTRON50 jaccording to the selected battery lclu el HYTRON140 The variable range is changed by the DIONIC90 litem settings selected on the BATTERY Aiei R au orig ea lea i et thepa DIONIC160 SETTING1 page 164 and BATTERY NP L7 SETTING2 page 165 menus C U F ENDURA7 The initial value for TYPE A is set to CARDEND JON Select whether
291. unit and AJ RC10G are turned OFF Dedicated cable AJ RC10G 98 Preparation Connection of the remote control unit AJ RC10G Connection of the external switch It is possible to draw 1 5 A current from the DC OUT connector of the unit REC start stop can be controlled by connecting an external switch to this connector Since a tally lamp can be used by connecting an LED to this connector it is useful for shooting video when fixing the camera on a crane DC OUT connector Connector at the cable side O HR10A 7R 4P 73 Hirose Denki LED V4 Resistance OO gt E Max 50mA REC start stop Se ee ee ee ee ee aaa D l 1 GND 2 TALLY OUT Open collector output on the unit side TALLY ON Low impedance TALLY OFF High impedance 3 REC start stop switch This is connected in parallel to the REC START button on the unit or the VTR button on the lens 4 12 V Preparation Connection of the external switch Preparation 99 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails A clip is a data group that includes the images and voices created from one shooting session together with additional information such as text memos and meta data The following manipulations can be performed using the cursor and SET buttons while checking the images displayed on the LCD monitor Playback delete
292. ush down and hold the release lever on the battery holder Then slide the battery pack in the opposite direction to the arrow while holding the lever down Preparation lt BATTERY P2CARD gt screen in the MAIN Please refer to BATTERY SETTING1 page 164 for The following Anton Bauer batteries can be used Preparation Power Supply 89 Using an NP 1 type battery pack CAUTION These servicing instructions are for use by qualified service personnel only To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock do not perform any servicing other than that contained in the operating instructions unless you are qualified to do so 1 Remove the battery holder 2 Mount the NP 1 type battery case on the camera recorder Tighten the mounting screws Tighten the power contact screws Insert the upper part of the removed cover in the direction of the arrow Align the holes in the bottom part metal part of the cover with the holes in the case and secure the cover with the screw Note When mounting the battery holder take care not to pinch the connection cord 90 Preparation Power Supply When using a V mount type battery pack Mount the V mount adapter plate Insert the plate and slide it in the direction of the arrow K WSK 3 Setting the battery type Select the battery type listed under BATTERY SELECT Select BATTERY SELECT from the lt BATTERY P2CARD gt scree
293. ust the brightness of markers and CHARLVL 60 characters displayed on the VF 70 80 90 C U F R 100 154 Menu Menu Description Tables ZEBRA Pattern Display Video Level ZEBRA 2 SPOT 109 ZEBRA 2 DETECT ZEBRA 1 DETECT 0 The in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode VF MARKER VF USER BOX Items Adjustable Remarks Items Adjustable Remarks DataSaved Range Data Saved Range TABLE A Select the VF MARKER setting table USER BOX ON For setting whether the user box is B First select table A or B then set the OFF displayed in the viewfinder or not ICIU FIR items below for each table IC U FIR CENTER OFF Switch the center mark USER BOX f1 For setting the horizontal width of the MARK i OFF Do not display center mark WIDTH user box 2 1 large 13 3 2 Hollow large i g 3 small C U F R 100 4 Hollow small USER BOX 1 For setting the horizontal position of the C U F R HEIGHT i user box center SAFETY OFF Select the frame type for the safety Re MARK 1 zone clulFIR i00 2 i ii display frame USER BOX H 50 For setting the horizontal position of the POS user box center 00 c u F R 50 2 Corner frame USER BOX V 50 For setting the vertical position of th
294. ustments and Settings for Recording Handling data 10 Press the JOG dial button to display the following message WRITE y hb APETA TITLE J 1 1 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES Then press the dial button This writes the title into the scene file area of the unit internal memory 12 To exit the menu press the MENU button E Resetting Menu Option Settings to Defaults The menu settings can be reset to their defaults To reset the settings to their defaults select the menu option READ FACTORY DATA in the lt INITIALIZE gt screen which is accessible from the FILE page All settings will be reset to their defaults Note This operation does not delete the scene file lens file and the information stored as the user data E Lens file lt INITIALIZE gt READ FACTORY DATA WRITE USER DATA The built in memory of the unit stores eight sets of lens files On the SD memory card eight titles for eight sets of lens files in a table total 64 sets can be written E How to provide lens files The following data are recorded on the lens file Title name White shading correction value Flare compensation value RB gain offset correction value Adjustment of white shading For the white shading adjustment refer to Adjusting the Lens White Shading page 93 Adjustment of the flare Using the menu operations open the lt LENS FILE ADJ gt
295. value is menu are disabled The set value is s c U FIR displayed S C U F R di playea R PEDESTAL 1 100 For setting the pedestal level of the Rich B GAIN AWB 200 For setting the Bch gain when the if the remote control unit is PRE WHITE BAL switch is in the PRST 000 connected settings made from the 000 position 400 menu are disabled The set value is 4200 lf the remote control unit is slclulF R displayed connected settings made from the g PEDESTALS 100 For setting the pedestal level of the menu are disabled The set value is Gch S C U F R displayed 000 eif the remote control unit is R GAIN AWB A 200 For setting the Rch gain when the 100 connected settings made from the WHITE BAL switch is in the A position menu are disabled The set value is 000 lf the remote control unit is slclulF R displayed 200 connected settings made Trom the B PEDESTAL 100 For setting the pedestal level of the Bch menu are disabled The set value is Mee if the remote control unit is S C U F R displayed 000 connected settings made from the B GAIN AWB A 200 For setting the Bch gain when the 100 menu are disabled The set value is Jono WHITE BAL switch is in the A position slclulF R displayed eae ee remote Contro UNIE BIS PEDESTAL ON For setting the pedestal levels of the 200 connected settings made TOWNS Jopet NEE Rch the Gch and the Bch when the MENAS disabled The set value is auto black balance
296. values When the S GAIN super gain function is activated the AWB switch does not function and the value set for PRST is used Setting the auto tracking white balance ATW The unit has an auto tracking white balance ATW feature that automatically tracks the white balance for pictures according to lighting conditions The ATW feature can be assigned to Position B of the WHITE BAL switch To do so the menu option AWB B must be set to ATW This option can be found in the lt WHITE BALANCE MODE gt screen which is accessible from the CAM OPERATION page The ATW feature may be assigned to the USER MAIN USER1 or USER2 button For more information see Assigning Functions to USER MAIN USER1 and USER2 Buttons page 44 To cancel the auto tracking white balance Press the user button that has the ATW feature assigned or change the position of the WHITE BAL switch Note that when the ATW feature is assigned to B of the WHITE BAL switch the auto tracking white balance cannot be cancelled with a user button r lt WHITE BALANCE MODE gt FILTER INH ON SHOCKLESS AWB NORMAL AWB AREA 125 AWB B MEM ATW SPEED NORMAL COLOR TEMP PRE 3200K AWB A TEMP 3200K AWB B TEMP 3200K Note This function does not guarantee 100 accuracy of the white balance When using the unit remember that there will be some allowance in the trackability of changes in lighting conditions and pull in accuracy o
297. ver 60P 2 3 Time code frame digit mm Updated frame oo 01 02 03 04 I 05 06 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Image IATATBIBIBICICIDIDIDJAJA BIB c Dpp Bee eoo Updated frame information 10 01 Ot 00 f 10 10 01 00 10 10 01 0t 00 Frame rate 30P Over 60P 2 2 25P Over 50P 2 2 Time code frame digit 00 o 02 Image ATAJBIB CIC Updated frame information 10 10 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting Time Data 5 52 E Setting the Internal Clock s Date and Time 1 Position the DISPLAY switch at UB 2 Press the HOLD button to display a date in the display window 3 Position the TCG switch at SET 4 Use the CURSOR and SET buttons to set the year month and day Y M D Note that any later than 2030 cannot be set gt button Shifts the target blinking digit to the right lt button Shifts the target blinking digit to the left A button Advances the blinking number by one digit V button Winds back the blinking number by one digit 5 Press the HOLD button to display a time in the display window 6 Use the CURSOR buttons to set the hour minute and second h min s 7 Position the TCG switch at F RUN or R RUN The internal clock starts at the moment the switch position is ch
298. wfinder indicates TURN POWER OFF Then turn the POWER switch of the camera recorder off and wait five seconds or longer before turning the camera recorder on again REC SIGNAL menu option CAM Signals from the camera are recorded The CAMERA MODE option allows you to select a camera operation mode frame mode Signals from the DVCPRO DV connector are recorded For information about the 1394 connection see Connection through the DVCPRO DV connector page 118 Signals from the GENLOCK IN connector are recorded when the camera recorder is in SD mode 480 59 94i or 576 50 SDI Signals from the SDI IN connector are recorded when the AJ YA350G an SDI IN option is installed 1394 VIDEO Notes When VIDEO is selected video may produce noise if the signals from GENLOCK IN are non standard signals When SDI is selected the time code or UMID superimposed on SDI input signals are not recorded 36 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Multi Format CAMERA MODE menu option Used to select a camera operation mode when the option REC SIGNAL is set to CAM For information about the behavior for each setting see Recording formats and output connector signal formats page 37 Note When the camera has been switched from 60i 60P or 30P to 24P or 24AP video may produce noise for a moment because the pull down five frame cycle is adjusted This is not an abnormal condition REC MODE menu option U
299. y Video is not output and the camera recorder operates in power saving mode CAM OFF Note that the audio output is synchronised with the video For types of video outputs see Settings of signals output from VIDEO OUT connector page 72 or Settings of signals output from MON OUT connector page 73 Notes During recording this switch does not switch output signals before stopping the recording operation When CAM is not selected through the REC SIGNAL menu option the output signals are the same as for MEM even if the switch is set to CAM The menu option REC SIGNAL is found in the SYSTEM MODE screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page 18 Parts and their Functions Shooting and Recording Playback Functions Section 20 21 22 23 24 20 26 27 28 29 REW rewind button and lamp During pause this button performs a fast reverse playback with the lamp blinking During playback it performs an approximately 4x fast reverse playback with the PLAY and REW lamps blinking If this button is pressed when playback is paused the start of the clip being played back is located in pause mode STOP button This button stops playback FF fast forward button and lamp During pause this button is used to perform fast playback with the lamp blinking During playback it performs an approximately 4x fast playback with the PLAY and FF lamps blinking If this button is pressed when playback i
300. y Set up to P2 card Insertion 1 Insert a charged battery pack 2 Turn on the POWER switch and ensure that more than four segments of the battery remaining amount indication bar are illuminated f the number of illuminated segments is fewer than five first check the battery placement If placement is not the problem replace the battery with a fully charged one 3 Insert a P2 card and ensure that the P2 CARD ACCESS LED stays on in orange or green Then close the slide out door When more than one P2 card slot contains a P2 card the card in the slot with the lowest number is used first However regardless of slot number a P2 card inserted later will not be accessed until the other cards have been used Example If all five slots contain P2 cards the cards are used in order of slot numbers 1 gt 2 3 4 5 However if the P2 card in Slot 1 is removed and then re inserted the cards will be used in the following order 23 451 30 Recording and Playback Basic Procedures Note that the recording order is retained even if the power is turned off When the power is next turned on the last card written before powering down will be the target card Note When SLOT 1 is selected for the menu option PON REC SLOT SEL recording starts from the P2 card inserted in the smallest slot number after the power is turned on This option is found in the REC FUNCTION screen on the SYSTEM SETTIN
301. y form on the liquid crystal surface of the monitor If this happens wipe off the moisture with a soft dry cloth When the camera recorder is very cold the video image in the LCD monitor will appear slightly darker immediately after the power is turned on Once the interior of the camera recorder warms up the LCD monitor delivers normal brightness Self portrait Shooting When shooting with the LCD display angled 180 degrees towards the lens you can set the menu option SELF SHOOT to MIRROR to horizontally flip the video image on the LCD display and allow you to view a mirror image while shooting Note that only the video image on the LCD monitor is horizontally flipped not the actual video being recorded The menu option SELF SHOOT can be found in the lt LCD MONITOR screen which is accessible from the SYSTEM SETTING page Notes When the LCD monitor is angled 180 degrees towards you with the menu option SELF SHOOT to MIRROR the LCD monitor does not provide the same status indication as the viewfinder regardless of the setting for the menu option LCD MON CHAR Return signals from the GENLOCK IN connector cannot be output to the LCD monitor When the OUTPUT SEL switch is positioned to CAM in the HD mode 1080i 720P playback cannot be output to the LCD monitor The HD viewfinder must be used to view playback Adjustments and Settings for Recording Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor Adjustmen
302. yed back accessible After the operation in process read data 7 To exit the menu press the MENU button The settings menu will be replaced by status indications for the unit E How to Use the User Data It is possible to transfer settings and other data to the user area of the internal memory of the unit This data allows you to quickly reproduce an optimum setup state To write data go to the lt INITIALIZE gt screen from the FILE page To read the written user data go to the lt SCENE gt screen from the FILE page To write settings data in the user area 1 Navigate the menu to the lt INITIALIZE gt screen 2 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option WRITE USER DATA lt INITIALIZE gt READ FACTORY DATA WRITE USER DATA 3 Press the JOG dial button to display the following message WRITE XES D bs 4 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES Then press the dial button This writes the settings data into the user area of the internal memory of the unit 5 To exit the menu press the MENU button To read written user data 1 Navigate the menu to the lt SCENE gt screen 2 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option READ USER DATA lt SCENE gt READ USER DATA SCENE SEL al READ WRITE RESET TITLE1 2288 88e8 TITLE 88 888 TITLES te eRe TITLE4 trta a 3 Press the J

Operating Instructions - Cinematography Mailing List

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents